Home

Printronix P7000 Printer User Manual

1. ECT On F j g i RP1 Default 470 Ohm Alt 1 220 Ohm Alt 2 1K Ohm oo om gg O g 0 E 0 D o D N t 0 I RP2 Default 1K Ohm be F Alt 1 330 Ohm Alt 2 None MN E 0 oj D So D 0 o JZ 0 I Fo i a am 1 4 Figure 24 Resistor Locations 302 Terminating Resistor Configurations The shipping kit for this printer includes 220 ohm pull up and 330 ohm pull down alternate terminating resistors If you install the 220 ohm pull up resistor you must also install the 330 ohm pull down resistor Table 11 lists the three terminating resistor configurations you can install Table 11 Terminating Resistor Configurations CAUTION Removal And Installation The procedure for removing and installing terminating resistors is provided in your Maintenance Manual Configuration Pull Up RP1 Pull Down RP2 Factory Default 470 ohm 1K ohm Alternate 1 220 ohm 330 ohm Alternate 2 1K ohm none This is an involved maintenance procedure To avoid damage to the equipment only a trained technician should perform this procedure 303 Chapter 5 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces RS 232 And RS 422 Se
2. Standard Coax Params Char Set Translation Active Char Prt Partial PA1 PA2 Select Tol Set Line see next page Secondary Set Enable Primary Set Disable Buffer Early Print SCS Buffer Cancel PTX Change Reprint Cmpl Cntrl IGP DCU Transparent Case Disable Don t Wait Enable Lead in Chars Dual Case Enable Wait Until Done Disable Set 1 lt gt Mono Case Set 2 Set 3_ _ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1 5F 40 FF Start Code 2 5F 40 FF Stop Code 5B 40 FF Alt Set 80 9F Printable Control Code Set Text Image Buf Intervention Compatibility Translate Host Orientn Size Req Op Table Override Control By Host 4K Send To Host see next page Default Disable Left to Right 2K Do Not Send Downloaded Enable Right to Left Format Max Print Buffer Print Control Width Disable 13 2 inches Disable Enable Printer Width Enable 169 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Char Set Select from page 169 Primary Secondary Factory Default Sets Sets 0037 English US 0289 Span Alt 0890 Yugos Old English US Portuguese 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 1097 Farsi English UK Portug Alt 0285 English UK 0500 Belg New 1025 Cyrilli
3. UPC Rot Char Ignore Midline PY Dark Width Limit Descenders Size Spaces Barcode Enable Adjusted Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Not Adjusted Enable Enable Enable Enable Absorb After IGP110 APN Compatbl Disable Disable Enable Enable 153 Chapter 4 IGP VGL Emulation SFCC amp Pwrup This option has several sub options which define the SFCC and power up configuration used with VGL VGL SFCC This option selects the Special Function Control Code The default value 5E Run a configuration printout to determine the currently selected VGL SFCC Power Up X e Disable default e Enable Selects the ignore mode as the power up default and selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default All characters are ignored until a A command is received Power Up F e Disable default e Enable Selects free format mode as the power up default and selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default Free format causes the VGL to ignore carriage returns line feeds and all characters below hex 20 sent from the host Power Up PY e Disable default e Enable Selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default LPI The number of lines to be printed per inch For example at 6 Ipi there is 1 6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line 154 IGP VGL Submenu Graphics Optio
4. Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 1 Host nStrobe HostClk Host Clk 2 Host Printer Data 1 LSB 3 Host Printer Data 2 4 Host Printer Data 3 5 Host Printer Data 4 6 Host Printer Data 5 7 Host Printer Data 6 8 Host Printer Data 7 9 Host Printer Data 8 MSB 10 Printer nAck PtrClk PtrClk 11 Printer Busy PtrBusy PtrBusy 12 Printer PError AckDataReq AckDataReq 13 Printer Select Xflag Xflag 14 Host nAutoFd Host Busy HostAck 15 Not Defined 16 Logic Grid 17 Chassis Grid 18 Printer Peripheral Logic High 299 Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Table 10 1284 Signals continued Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 19 Signal Ground nStrobe 20 Signal Ground Data 1 21 Signal Ground Data 2 22 Signal Ground Data 3 23 Signal Ground Data 4 24 Signal Ground Data 5 25 Signal Ground Data 6 26 Signal Ground Data 7 27 Signal Ground Data 8 28 Signal Ground PError Select nAck 29 Signal Ground Busy nFault 30 Signal Ground nAutoFd nSelectin ninit 31 Host ninit 32 Printer NFault nDataAvail aDataAvail 33 Not Defined 34 Not Defined 35 Not Defined 36 Host nSelectin 1284 Active 1284 Active NOTE The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer should not exceed 32 feet 10 meters 300 Signals Host Clock nWrite Driven
5. CTHI LinePrinter 44 48XX IGP PGL IGP VGL IPDS ANSI page 167 page 209 page 248 page 126 page 148 page 257 PCL II 1 LG page 263 page 269 166 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation EMULATION from page 70 Factory Default 1 Coax Twinax Host Interface CTHI Standard Simp Prot Conv Coax Twinax 3270 5250 SPC Coax SPC Twinax Params Params Params Params Params Params page 169 page 180 page 187 page 196 page 202 page 206 Standard With a standard coax interface the printer emulates the following IBM coax printer models e 3287 Models 1 and 2 e 4234 Model 1 With a standard twinax interface the printer emulates the following IBM twinax printer models e 4234 Models 2 and 12 e 5225 Models 1 2 3 and 4 NOTE The standard Coax Twinax emulation selection will only be available if Coax or Twinax is selected from the HOST INTERFACE menu See page 85 For more information refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual The 3270 Params and 5250 Params selection is available only if the TN option is installed 167 168 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Simple Prot Conv The Simple Protocol Converter SPC option allows those who use third party add on Coax or Twinax protocol converters t
6. Data Term Request to Buffer Size Poll Poll Idle k Ready Send in K Character Response Response True On Line and BNF 16 00 Hex 0 ms Disable On Line and BNF Off Line or BF 1 16 0 FF hex 1 30 ms Enable Off Line or BF On Line On Line False False True One Char Framing Enquiry Errors Disable Enable Enable Disable 98 Serial Submenu Interface Type This parameter allows you to select either the RS 232 or RS 422 serial port interface Data Protocol You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host interface requirements XON XOFF default The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off In some situations such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is too slow or too fast the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF character An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent the printer firmware will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received When cleared the printer will resume receiving data XON The data does not have any End of Text codes XON XOFF is a non block protocol ETX ACK End of Text Acknowledge The host controls the flow of communication to the printer by sending a block of data and endi
7. 13 2 Inches 13 6 Inches Darker 6 Darker 5 Darker 4 Darker 3 Darker 2 Darker 1 Normal Lighter 1 Lighter 2 Lighter 3 Lighter 4 Lighter 5 Lighter 6 Lighter 7 Lighter 8 Lighter 9 Lighter 10 1 Factory 2 8 1 8 QUICK SETUP Host Interface The Host Interface menu enables you to select and configure interfaces between the printer and your host computer Device ID This parameter defines the printer emulation as IPDS 4234 2 or 5225 After the emulation has been changed a POR status is sent to the host IPDS is the default Adapter Address e IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN e Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets e Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation e MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only e DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting 75 76 Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Ethernet Address IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or s
8. e High ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in dark mode at 120 x 72 dpi Expanded Font e Scalable default These expanded characters have rounded edges e Block These are block characters compatible with IGP X10 printers LP Font e Disable default The IGP VGL uses its default half dot font which is slightly different from the standard bitmap font used by LP at 12 13 15 and 17 cpi e Enable The IGP VGL uses the same font as used by LP at all cpi 157 Chapter 4 IGP VGL Emulation MSI Check Digit e Print default The check digit is appended at the end of the printable data field for MSI barcodes Don t Print The check digit for MSI barcodes does not print 125 Selection 125 Odd Data default When an odd number of data is provided the default setting Leading Zero will add a zero to the beginning of the bar code data The setting Check Digit will add a check digit to the end of the bar code data so that the results add up to an even number of data e Convert Alpha Disable is the default When enabled each non digit 125 bar code character will convert to 0 NOTE If you use an Interleaved 2 5 barcode that automatically adds the check digit type code k or IBARC type code INT2 5CD or INT2 5CDA the check digit is added regardless of how this parameter is set Al 00 Spaces This option is designated for EAN UCC 128 barcodes whose application identifier Al is 00 e Disabl
9. DP Data Processing standard quality CORESPON Correspondence near letter quality COMPRESS Compressed vertically compressed for printing long graphs and charts OCR A amp OCR B Optical Character Recognition sets A and B HS High Speed Draft quality for high speed printing Character Set This option allows you to select a character set The character set you select can be any of the Digital Multinational sets which include the U S ASCII set and several foreign language and special character sets Vert Forms Bot Frm 66 6 default This option sets the bottom margin for the forms You must specify the bottom margin in lines at 6 lines per inch ranging from 0 to 198 lines 33 inches The default setting is 66 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0 so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected 271 Chapter 4 LG Emulation 272 Top Mrg 6 0 This option sets the top margin for the forms You must specify the top margin in lines at 6 lines per inch ranging from 0 to 198 lines 33 inches The default setting is 0 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and bottom margins do not cross each other Bot Mrg 66 6 This option sets the bottom margi
10. board PAP NT AT SPEED No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board PAP UNEXP INT No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board PARAMETER No Illegal parameter Contact your system ERROR value received in administrator command code PARITY ERROR Yes Parity error Check your printer serial serial interface interface parameter settings if necessary adjust them so that they match the settings of the attached host PLAT INV CMD No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board Platen Invalid Command PLAT INV PARM No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board Platen Invalid Parameter PLAT INV STATE No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized service representative 336 Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PLEASE WAIT N A The printer finished No action is required RESET IN loading the PROGRESS program into flash memory and is automatically resetting itself POWER SAVER N A Status message No action is required MODE printer is in low energy idle state all fans and higher voltages are off only 5Vdc logic circuits are active POWER SUPPLY Yes Power supply Check printer HOT sensors reporthi
11. e 10 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using half duplex e 10 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using full duplex ETHERNET ADDRESS e 100 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using half duplex e 100 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using full duplex Job Control The job control mode has three options e Standard default The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job The status line shows done when the job is completely received by the NIC This is the default e Enhanced The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job The status line shows done when the job is fully printed e Off No job synchonization between the NIC and the printer ETHERNET ADDRESS ETHERNET Factory Default ADDRESS from page 108 IP Address Subnet Gateway MAC DHCP Mask Address Address XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX hhhhhhhhhhhh Disable Enable IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN 113 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU 114 Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnet
12. e Enable Enables the print mode option LG Emulation Plot Mode Opt When enabled this option will plot with greater efficiency particularly with respect to the Postnet barcode Postnet is printed in the same density as the current print mode font so that reverse motion will be inhibited when possible e Disable default Disables the print mode option This provides compatibility with older LG printer products e Enable Enables the print mode option 2 5 Guard Bars e Disable default Interleaved 2 5 bar codes are printed normally with no guard bars e Enable Horizontal guard bars are printed above and below each Interleaved 2 5 bar code This option only applies to Interleaved 2 5 bar codes 275 Chapter 4 PRINTER CONTROL PRINTER CONTROL 276 PRINTER CONTROL from page 70 Factory Default 1 Not available in LG or PCL II Ribbon End Eject Open Platen Bar Code Tear Bar Point Function BOF Quality Dist Darker 6 Standard Disable Dark 7 46 inches Darker 5 Simple Tear Enable Draft 4 5 10 5 Darker 4 Form Saver Darker 3 Out 3 Back 2 Darker 2 Out 4 Back 2 Darker 1 Disable Normal Lighter 1 Lighter 2 Lighter 3 Lighter 4 Lighter 5 Lighter 6 Lighter 7 Lighter 8 Lighter 9 Lighter 10 Unidirectional Display Accented Language Char 1 Disable English Standard Enable German Tall French I
13. 19 CONFIG CONTROL lt A gt Name Configs 20 CONFIG CONTROL Save Config UNTIL 21 Save Config lt gt 22 Save Config TEST now appears as TEST one of configuration choices 23 Saving Configuration ENTER Q Save Config TEST Your configuration is saved as TEST 67 68 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press LCD Notes 24 ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key lt a gt LOCKED 25 ONLINE On as Ribbon Life 100 Now you have the saved configuration for later use if needed Optimizing Print Quality LP IGP PGL and IGP VGL Emulations You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper barcodes and characters Doing so however will decrease the printer speed To optimize print quality you can change the values of the following configuration parameters Bar Code Quality Printer Control menu Select Dark or Recommended Recommended prints the darkest images but at the slowest speed Dark prints at a faster speed than Recommended but the characters are not as dark See page 279 for a written description of Bar Code Quality Print Quality IGP PGL emulation Select Best or High Best prints the darkest images but at the slowest speed High prints at a faster speed than Best but the characters are not as dark See page 129 for the IGP PGL Configuration Menu and see page 143 for a written description of Print
14. 21 Close the tractor door 39 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures 40 Tractor Splined Shaft p2scale2 Tractor Paper PEPE PEC Pee Pee Pee Peeper Peep I 10 20 30 40 50 prre S E E Scale Figure 11 Positioning the Left Tractor to Avoid Damage CAUTION To avoid damage to the printer caused by printing on the platen always position the left tractor unit directly to the left of the 1 mark on the paper scale 22 Normally you should not need to adjust the position of the left tractor If adjustment is necessary unlock the left tractor Slide the tractor until it is directly to the left of the number 1 on the paper scale and lock it You can also use the paper scale to count columns Reload Paper Tractor Door Tractor Lock zpudomg Figure 12 Loading Paper onto the Sprockets 23 Unlock the right tractor 24 Load the paper onto the sprockets and close the tractor door If necessary slide the right tractor to remove paper slack or to adjust for various paper widths Then lock the tractor 41 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Upper Paper Guide Upper Paper Guide Wire Guide 2 Paper Slot a Cabinet Model Pedestal Model Figure 13 Using the Paper Guide to Orient the Paper 25 Pedestal models Using the vertical position knob to move the paper up guide the paper over the upper paper gui
15. B43 ERROR SDRAM TOO MANY BANKS 322 B44 ERROR SDRAM NOT 64 BITS WIDE 322 B45 ERROR SDRAM IS WRONG VOLTAGE 322 B46 ERROR SDRAM HAS MIXED SIZES 322 B47 ERROR SDRAM LARGER THAN 256M 322 B49 ERROR SDRAM LOGICAL BANKS 323 B50 ERROR SDRAM LOGIC COMB BANKS 323 B50 XX CLEAR FLASH 323 B51 ERROR 50A LINE STUCK LOW 323 B51 XX PROGRAMMING 323 B55 STATUS SEND PROGRAM TO EC 323 BARCODE DAMAGED 324 Index BARCODE MISSING 324 BUFFER OVERRUN 324 CLEAR PAPER JAM 324 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH 325 CLOSE PLATEN 325 COIL HOT 325 CTL VOLT FAIL 325 DIAGNOSTIC PASSED 325 DO NOT POWER OFF 325 DRVR CIR BAD 325 E NET TEST UNAVAILABLE 326 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID 326 ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX 326 ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID 326 ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX 326 ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM 327 ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED 327 ERROR LOCKED SN nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n 327 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED 327 ERROR NVRAM FAILURE 327 ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES 328 381 Index ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM 328 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH 328 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE 328 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID 328 ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED 328 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX 328 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH 329 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM 329 ERROR WRONG OEM OR PRINTER TYPE 329 ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED 329 ETHERNET DETECTED 329 EXCESS
16. Your printer contains among other software Printronix operating software including but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System the eCos Software as embedded software The terms of this Agreement apply only to the eCos Software and all other embedded software supplied with the printer You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of your printer 1 Object Code License Printronix grants you a nonexclusive license to use the Printronix Software the eCos Software and all other embedded software collectively the Embedded Software or the Software only in conjunction with the printer As the rightful possessor of the printer you may make a reasonable number of copies of the Software as necessary for backup configuration and restoration of the printer You must reproduce the copyright notice and any other legend of ownership on each copy of the Software you make You may transfer possession of the Software and its media to another party only with the transfer of the printer on which the Software is used If you do so you must give the other party a copy of these terms and provide all user documentation to that party When you do so you must destroy any copies of Software not resident in the printer Your license for the Software terminates when you no longer rightfully possess the printer No other rights under this license are granted 2 Source Code A source code version of eCo
17. at 6 LPI the maximum form length is 6 LPI x 24 inches 144 lines Only valid form length values will be accepted If you select a length that is larger than the maximum length for the current LPI the maximum length will be used If you need a longer page length you must first change the LPI 251 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation IMPORTANT IMPORTANT 252 If the form length is set in lines and you change the LPI the effective page length changes to the form length in characters divided by the new LPI NOTE Receipt of a data stream control code which changes the form length overrides the form length previously specified via the operator panel Form Width Allows you to input the form width in characters from 1 through 272 The maximum form width in characters depends on the current CPI setting it is equal to the maximum form width in inches multiplied by the current CPI setting Only valid form width values will be accepted If a width is selected that is larger than the maximum width for the current CPI then the maximum width will be used If a larger width value is desired then the CPI value must be changed first Table 7 lists the maximum number of characters that can be printed for a given Characters Per Inch CPI setting If the form width is set in characters and the CPI is changed the effective page width is changed to be equal to the form width in characters divided by the new CPI Table 7 Form Width c
18. e CIRCUMFLEX hex 5E also called caret e TILDE hex 7E NOTE SOH ETX and ESC are non printables The characters 4 and are printable however do not use them as printables in the host data stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will occur Margins e Left Margin Set in columns Column zero is defined as the far left edge of the page and column numbering increments from left to right e Right Margin Set in columns Column zero is defined as the far right edge of the page and column numbering increments from right to left e Top Margin Defined in lines starting from line zero at the top of the page and incrementing from the top down Bottom Margin Defined in lines starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up QUICK SETUP Form Length Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page You can set the form length in inches millimeters mm or as a function of the current Ipi lines per inch Form Width The form width can be specified in inches millimeters or as a function of the current cpi characters per inch The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width Vert Forms Bot Frm 66 6 default This option sets the bottom margin for the forms You must specify the bottom margin in lines at 6 lines per inch ranging from 0 to 198 lines 33 inches The default setting is 66 Press the righ
19. 186 3270 Params menu 195 5250 Params menu 201 Forms Handling 135 FRAMING ERROR message 330 Al 00 Spaces 158 Append Rotated 155 Auto FF at PN 160 Expanded Font 157 125 Selection 158 Ignore Lxx Cmd 160 Ignore Dots 155 Ignore Spaces 157 IGP110 Compatbl 160 LP Font 157 Midline PY includes PN 157 MSI Check Digit 158 Framing Errors Serial submenu 105 Print Quality 157 FREEFORM OFF message 331 Rot Char Size 156 FREEFORM ON OFF HOLD KEY Slash 0 155 PWRUP message 331 G Gateway address Adapter Address menu 109 Ethernet Address menu 114 WLAN Address menu 118 Graphic CharSize IPDS Emulation Graphic Chek Cod 184 384 True Vert 1 10 156 Truncate Alpha 155 UPC Descenders 156 Width Limit 159 Graphics Print IPDS Emulation 259 Graphics Quality IPDS Emulation 259 Graphics Scaling IPDS Emulation 261 261 GRF CHECK ERROR PRESS STOP message 331 H HAM COIL OPEN message 331 HAMMER COIL BAD Message 331 HB NOT INSTALLD message 331 Hex Dump Mode MAINT MISC menu 282 Hex Dump printing 315 Hexdump Mode IPDS Emulation 262 HMR BANK FAN FLT Message 332 Horiz Forms 80 Horiz Forms LG Emulation 272 Host Command 213 Host Form Length 139 Host Interface 75 HOST INTERFACE menu 85 Host Override 178 185 3270 Params menu 195 5250 Params menu 201 Host PI 164 HS Print High Speed Print P Series XQ Emulation 230 l 2 5 Checksum IPDS Emu
20. 27 Chapter 3 The Control Panel beeps if configured to sound and a descriptive fault message displays The current operating mode can be selected via control panel keys or can result from routine operations such as powering on the printer The Control Panel PRT CONFIG Circular Figure 5 shows the keys displays and indicators as they appear on the control panel The following section provides the descriptions and functions of the control panel keys Key combinations are indicated with the plus sign For example Press A V means to press the A key and the V key at the same time Message Display SET TOF Emulation Status Indicator Pad C 5 Z ey HIBBON TA eee RE LINKO OQ ziuedomg JOB SELECT ENTER 28 ON LINE CLEAR VIEW EJECT Ribbon Life PAPER ADVANCE Indicator CANCEL Figure 5 Control Panel Control Panel Keys Control Panel Keys ON LINE CLEAR Toggles the printer between online and offline modes If a fault condition exists pressing this key will clear the fault message and return the printer from fault mode to offline mode NOTE If the fault condition is not corrected before pressing this key the fault message will reappear when attempting to place the printer online PAPER ADVANCE Performs advance to top of form as defined by the current active form length The key w
21. ANSEMUlAtiON sietett ne nesa e a a aa 248 IPDS Emulation i stea atann aa aaae astiaa 257 PCL I Emulation 0 ccccceccceceeeeeceneeeeeeeeeseneeeseeeeseneeeneaees 263 LG Emulation 0 cccccecccceeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeseneeeneneeeteaees 269 PRINTER CONTROL ececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeneeeeenaeeteeaees 276 ADVANCED USER kar pe aen nesie a eresia 281 DIAGNOSTICS E A A ET 289 Interfaces ini E 293 0 YETA CSI AE 293 Dataproducts Parallel Interface eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 294 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 008 295 Centronics Parallel Interface eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eneee 296 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals c 297 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface n e 298 Compatibility MOde cccceceseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeteneeetenaees 298 Nibble Mode atte cerscecteeteegeee cng eetit ue iera Lenore a eteeete tes 298 Byte Mode asec viceatsstenctisioapitic ania ts neue A ERN 298 Sigal ninek ne Heth ee a a e de 299 Terminating Resistor Configurations 302 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces cccceeeeeeees 304 REIA PA A E EAE E A 305 E PA AEE EEEE TEA 306 Reprogramming The Security Key 307 Reprogramming The Security Key sessen 307 How To Program The Security Key 307 Table of Contents 7 Troubleshooting 311 Cleaning Requirement cccccccceeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeneeeteeees 311 Exterior CleAning ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseneeenenees
22. APUBSESERESAEMARBS VCC OR I BOC VIAZATRRMNRECT CORE ZERK CHEAT b EERDE E aa A i JEF COMAILISHAEMBICHReBT SKIER German Conformity Statement Handbuchtexte FCC class A entspricht EMVG Klasse A Text Fur alle in Deutschland vertriebenen EN 55022 Klasse A Ger te Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit von Ger ten EMVG vom 18 September 1998 bzw der EMC EG Richtlinie 89 336 Dieses Ger t ist berechtigt in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG Konformit tszeichen CE zu f hren Verantwortlich f r die Konformit tserkl rung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die Printronix Deutschland GmbH 70548 Stuttgart Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 4 Abs 1 4 Das Ger t erf llt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A EN 55022 Klasse A Ger te m ssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden Warnung dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkst rungen verursachen in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden angemessene Ma nahmen durchzuf hren und daf r aufzukommen 362 EN 55024 Hinweis Wird dieses Ger t in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben wie in EN 55024 festgelegt dann kann es dabei eventuell gest rt werden In solch einem Fall ist der Abstand bzw die Abschirmung zu der industriellen St rquelle zu 6ergrvBern Anmerkung Um die Einhaltung des E
23. Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution FREEFORM OFF Yes A control panel key Press the key again is stuck in the down position FREEFORM ON No This message Contact your authorized OFF HOLD KEY appears if the service representative PWRUP freeform feature is enabled This feature is for manufacturing use only and is never used by the customer or field maintenance personnel GRF CHK ERROR Yes Printer has Press CLEAR and then PRESS STOP received a non ON LINE printable character HAM COIL OPEN No Electrical Contact your authorized malfunction of one service representative or more hammer coils HAMMER COIL No Hammer coil Contact your authorized BAD failed current test service representative etc at power up HB NOT INSTALLD No Self test does not Contact your authorized detect hammer coils service representative 331 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User 332 detect current in fan circuit Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution HMR BANK FAN Yes Sensors cannot Check that fan cable is FLT detect current in connected Check for fan circuit obstruction of vents and fan airway remove any obstructions Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents Power back on the printer If this message recurs contact your
24. LG Emulation CR This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CR LEF If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex OA into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer with each Carriage Return LF This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs This can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer e LF default Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e CR LF Each time the printer receives a Line Feed it inserts an additional Carriage Return code hex OD into the data stream This feature can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer 273 Chapter 4 LG Emulation 274 FF This parameter forces the
25. The P7000 Series PSA3 Printer The Printronix P7000 PSA3 Printer consists of 500 1000 1500 lines per minute lpm cabinet and pedestal models and a 2000 Ipm cabinet model All printer models are packaged in various configurations that offer software versatility and the latest refinements in printing technology The print mechanisms are housed in sound insulated cabinets which make the printer among the quietest line matrix printers in the world Additionally your printer has a flexible architecture that allows you to add new features and emulations as they become available LinePrinter Plus is the standard emulation LinePrinter Plus includes the Epson FX 1050 Printronix P Series P Series XQ Serial Matrix and Proprinter III XL emulations Coax Twinax IPDS ANSI LG PCL2 IGP PGL and IGP VGL graphics enhancement emulations are available as optional upgrades No matter what emulation is installed your printer is easy to use The message display and lights on the control panel communicate with you directly and clearly You can select every function on your printer at the control panel or you can send commands from the host computer 13 Chapter 1 Printer Overview 14 The printer model numbers indicate printing speed and physical configuration Model numbers beginning with P70 indicate pedestal models Model numbers beginning with P72 indicate cabinet models The final two digits in the model number refer to
26. Yugoslavian Multinational Prints out a table of the TN5250 interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the TN5250 interface is the current interface 197 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Active Char Set Selects which group of character sets Primary or Secondary will be active e Secondary Set default e Primary Set Prt Partial Line e Enable default When this option is enabled it forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer i e line not ending with a LF e Disable When disabled the last partial line of data will not be printed PTX Transparent Lead in Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard TN5250 emulations To access these features send text commands in the data stream The commands must have a start and end code Four sets are available e Set1 start code lt default stop code gt e Set 2 start code stop code e Set3 start code _ stop code _ e User Defined 198 5250 Params Usr Defined HTRN This option is used to set user defined lead in characters The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 5F default e Start Code 2 5F e Stop Code 5B Alt Set 80 9F e Printable default Prints
27. and the default is 0 e Days The range is 0 7 and the default is 0 e Renew Lifetime Units Renew lifetime unit in seconds The default is 0 Factory Default WLAN 1 Only if a Symbol radio card is installed LEAP 2 Only if a Cisco radio card is installed from page 108 Auth Method LEAP Reset LEAP LEAP Reset LEAP Username User Password Password Open LEAP Username 01 15 LEAP Password 01 15 Shared LEAP Username 16 30 LEAP Password 16 30 Kerberos LEAP Username 31 32 LEAP Password 31 32 LEAP 2 Auth Method This feature allows the user to select the authentication method used for the wireless network interface e Open the default Selects open authentication e Shared Selects shared key authentication e Kerberos Selects Kerberos authentication for use when a Symbol RF card is installed e LEAP Selects LEAP authentication for use with a Cisco RF card installed 123 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU 124 LEAP Username LEAP Username 01 15 The first 15 characters of the LEAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 LEAP Username 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the LEAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 LEAP User 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the LEAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 Reset LEAP User Resets the LEAP user name to an empty string LEAP Password LEAP Password 01 15
28. available The selections are as indicated below e Enable default Makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the ethernet installed e Disable Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer operation Novell Frame This selection determines which framing scheme will be used in processing Novell signals e Auto Sensing default Ethernet Il e Ethernet 802 3 e Ethernet 802 2 e 802 2 Snap 111 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU 112 ASCII Data Port This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs The data port number needs to match your host system setting e 9100 default e 1023 65535 IPDS Data Port This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the IPDS option is installed The range is 0 5000 and the factory default is 5001 Keep Alive Timer This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run With the Keep Alive Timer on the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated e 3 Minutes default e 2 10 Minutes Ethernet Speed This menu option only appears if a 10 100Base T network interface card NIC is installed The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different systems and networks The factory default is Auto Select e Auto Select default This setting tells the 10 100Base T NIC to perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex or 100 Full Duplex
29. from page 70 Load Save E Print L_ Delete Power Up Protect _ Config Config Config Config Config Configs Factory 1 Current Short 1 Factory Disable 1 8 2 8 Current Full 2 8 1 8 Enable Factory Power Up All 1 8 Name Reset Cfg Configs Names 1 8 1 2 8 All Load Config The printer can store numerous configurations in memory This parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration CONFIG CONTROL Save Config This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print job requirements This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first The factory default configuration cannot be changed See Saving Your New Configuration on page 61 for details Print Config This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations Store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for quick referral Delete Config You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations The factory default configuration cannot be deleted Power Up Config You can specify which of the nine configurations Factory or 1 8 will be the po
30. incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means whether manual graphic electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written consent of Printronix Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Printronix shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct or indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material The information in this manual is subject to change without notice COPYRIGHT 1997 2005 PRINTRONIX INC Trademark Acknowledgements IBM AS 400 and Proprinter are registered trademarks and Intelligent Printer Data Stream and IPDS are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Printronix PGL LinePrinter Plus and IGP are registered trademarks and P7005 P7010 P7015 P7205 P7210 P7215 P7220 and SureStak are trademarks of Printronix Inc ANSI is a registered trademark of the American National Standards Institute Inc Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation CSA is a registered certification mark of the Canadian Standards Association Dataproducts is a registered trademark of Dataproducts Corporation EIA is a registered service mark of the Electronic Indust
31. incorrectly the display will read Verification failed Start over at step 2 After entering the new lock combination successfully press the ON LINE key to put the printer back online NOTE The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered off and back on Ribbon Action Stop Ribbon End the default Stops ribbon action when ribbon life reaches 0 Ignore Ribbon End When selected the ribbon life display remains on the control panel and the printer continues to monitor ink consumption DIAGNOSTICS Ink Saver Mode The overall image density setting will be maintained at a lower level equivalent to approximately 0 2 PCS below the default setting The factory default setting is Disable Select Enable and press the ENTER key to activate the Ink Saver Mode DIAGNOSTICS Factory Default 1 If Ethernet adapter is present 2 Not available in PCL II or LG 3 Not available in LG DIAGNOSTICS from page 70 Printer Test Width Paper Out System Print Tests Dots Memory Statistics Shift Recycle Burnin Test Full Width 40 dots 32 On 144 9 Hrs All E s Print Error Log 3 80 col 4 76 Megabytes Print 8 3 Hrs E s TOF Print Ribbon Log Print Strokes All H s Clear Error Log 2 233441 All Underlines Adapter Test Print Lines All Black Ethernet Test 28250 Shuttle Slow Acoustic 2 11 inch Pages Shuttle Fast Dem
32. information on how to obtain a hex code printout Translation Tbl Prints a table of the Coax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the Coax interface is selected see HOST INTERFACE on page 85 Column 132 Wrap When enabled this option causes the printer to line wrap at 132 characters despite the current print density allowing more characters per line The options include e Disable default e Enable Usr Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 5F e Start Code 2 5F e Stop Code 5B 203 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 204 PA1 PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the Coax Systems Network Architecture Character String SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA1 ENABLED message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is placed online Refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for more information about SCS PA2 PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the OFFLINE state and the Coax SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA2 ENABLED message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator reque
33. it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex OA into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return 236 Proprinter XL Emulation Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable default Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data past the forms width Define LF Code e LF LLF default Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a Line Feed command is received The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e LF CR LF Forces an automatic carriage return with each Line Feed command received The next print position is print position 1 of the next line FF Valid at TOF e Enable default Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form Disable Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the Proprinter XL Character Set Menu on page 239 To use one of these sets choose the desired group heading such as European Sets and press ENTER Then choose the desired set
34. lt a gt LOCKED 16 ONLINE on a Ribbon Life 100 17 If you printed out the configuration store it in a safe place The printer is ready for operation Saving Your New Configuration Example 2 This example shows how to save a configuration as a named configuration Step Press LCD Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on 2 ON LINE CLEAR OFFLINE Cc CONFIG CONTROL 3 ENTER SWITCH Allows you to make lt i gt UNLOCKED configuration changes OFFLINE QUICK SETUP OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL UNTIL ID CONFIG CONTROL Load Config CONFIG CONTROL Name Configs UNTIL D Name Configs The LCD flashes 1 65 66 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press LCD Notes 8 Name Configs You will rename config 2 2 e UNTIL 9 2 ID 10 2 Cycle through the choices lt A gt oma ot until T displays Ti 2 Saves the first character r T_ 12 2 Cycle through the choices lt k gt ona TE until E displays 13 2 Saves the second e TE character 14 2 Cycle through the choices lt A gt unti TES until S displays 15 2 Saves the third character e TES_ Saving Your New Configuration Step Press LCD Notes 16 2 Cycle through the choices lt A gt UNTIL TEST until T displays 17 2 Saves the fourth e TEST_ character 18 ENTER Name Configs The configuration is C TEST renamed TEST
35. prime signal is asserted from the host Buffer Size in K Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port buffer You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments Auto Trickle Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer s buffers are almost full the printer will begin to trickle data in at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu until the buffers start to empty out Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use 93 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Dataproducts from page 85 For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter o
36. terminating 302 Resistors installation 303 removal 303 Resp Polarity Centronics Parallel submenu 92 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines 95 RESTORING BOOT CODE message 338 RIB INVLD CMD message 338 RIB INVLD STATE message 339 Ribbon Action PRINTER CONTROL 288 RIBBON DRIVE message 339 Ribbon End Point 80 Ribbon End Point PRINTER CONTROL 277 Ribbon Flipping 16 Ribbon Log 16 RIBBON NOT RECOGNIZED message 339 RIBBON STALL message 339 RIBBON UNDER 2 message 339 Ribbons changing 49 Rot Char Size 156 RS 232 305 Clear to Send CTS 306 Data Carrier Detect DCD 306 Data Set Ready DSR 306 Data Terminal Ready DTR 306 Receive Data RD 305 Request to Send RTS 305 Transmit Data TD 305 RS 232 Serial Interfaces 304 RS 422 306 RS 422 Serial Interfaces 304 S Save Config 81 83 Save Auto 60 Saving new configurations 61 Saving parameter settings 54 Scalable Size 142 SCS Buffer Cntrl 173 SCS COMMAND ERROR message 339 Second Char Set PCL II Emulation 265 SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED message 340 SECURITY VIOLATION message 339 Select CPI 78 Select Font 134 Select LPI 78 135 Select SO Char 138 Index SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR message 340 Serial Interfaces RS 232 304 RS 422 304 Serial Matrix Character Set menu 235 Serial Matrix Emulation 232 Alt Set 80 9F 234 Auto LF 233 Character Set 234 Control Code 06 232 Define CR Code 233 Define LF Co
37. 0 6 0 Disable Enable Enable Disable 1 33 8 0 Enable Disable Disable Enable 9 0 10 0 UPC Compressed Ignore IGP100 Optimized Error Descenders CPI Char Compatbl Ratio Report Enable Disable Ignore Mode Disable Disable On Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable Debug Mode Enable Fault Select Char Off ge 0 255 131 Chapter 4 IGP PGL Emulation IGP PGL Submenu with LG EMULATION from page 70 Factory Default IGP PGL Define CR Define LF Autowrap PGL PI Slew CR Edit Code Code SFCC Range CR CR LF LF Disable 7E 16 Disable CR CR LF LF CR LF Enable 15 Enable Select Select LPI Auto Skip Cmd Power On Ext Execute Font Uppercase Prefix IGP PGL Copy 0 6 0 Disable Enable Enable Disable 1 34 8 0 Enable Disable Disable Enable 9 0 10 0 UPC Compressed Ignore IGP100 Optimized Descenders CPI Char Compatbl Ratio Enable Disable Ignore Mode Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Select Char 0 0 255 132 IGP PGL Submenu Define CR Carriage Return Code This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs This is to be used only if the host computer does not send line feeds to the printer e CR CR defa
38. 311 Interior CIOANING cecceeeeeeeeeseneeeteneeeteeeeseeeeteeees 312 Diagnosing Problems 0 cece eee e tees eteeeeeeeeeeeeaes 314 Bar Code Verification ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenees 314 Printing A Hex DUMD eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaeeees 315 Fault Messages eani a 316 A Printer Specifications ccccccccee 345 Ribbon Specifications cccccccecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeseneeesenees 345 Paper Specifications ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneessneeessaees 346 Printer Weight And Dimensions 348 Environmental Characteristics cccceeseeeeeeeseneeeeees 348 Electrical Characteristics cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesnees 350 INtSMACES o a date adie el aed R 351 Printing Rates v iw ancients bee nate iene 351 ASCII Character Set c ssssseeeeees 353 C Communication Notices 000 355 NOlCOS i ccctevauoltene crinties alee aarieiglntei ite tie 355 Energy Sta eiie r aeara iaaa a a e E Eaa 358 Product Recycling and Disposal 359 Communication Statement ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteteeees 360 Lithium Battery Warning ceccceeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeetenaeeeeeee 365 Software License Agreement cccceeeeeeeeeeteeteteeees 366 11 12 Table of Contents 1 Introduction Printer Overview This chapter provides a general overview of your printer and the conventions used within this manual
39. 339 RIBBON STALL 339 RIBBON UNDER 2 339 SCS COMMAND ERROR 339 SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED 340 SECURITY VIOLATION 339 SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR 340 Index SHUTL INV CMD 340 SHUTL INV PARM 340 SHUTL OVR SPEED 340 SHUTTLE JAM 340 SHUTTLE STALL 341 SOFTWARE ERROR CYCLE POWER 341 SPX FOUND ERROR KEY NOT DETECTED 341 SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS ENABLED 341 SSTACKER JAM 342 STACK OVERFLOW 341 STACK UNDERFLOW 341 STACKER FAULT 342 STACKER FULL 342 TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN 342 TCB CORRUPTED 342 TCP PORT BUSY 342 UNDEF INTERRUPT 343 UNDFNED OPCODE 343 UNKNOWN RBN1 343 UNKNOWN RBN2 343 UP DRV SHORT 343 WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER 343 Fault Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 297 Features printer 13 FF After Job 177 194 383 Index FF Valid at TOF Proprinter XL Emulation 237 FF Validity 176 193 FF LG Emulation 274 File System ADVANCED USER menu 285 FIRMWARE ERROR message 330 Flash Avail DIAGNOSTICS 292 Graphic Chek Cod 5250 Params menu 200 Graphic Chek Err 184 Graphic Chek Err 5250 Params menu 199 Graphics Density PCL II Emulation 266 Graphics enhancement 17 Graphics Options 155 Absorb After PN 160 FM HEADER ERROR message 330 Absorb After PY 156 Font Attributes 214 ANSI Emulation menu 250 Font Set 163 Font Size IPDS Emulation 259 Font LG Emulation 271 Form Length 77 79 Form Width 77 79 Format Control 178
40. 3_ _ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1 5F 40 FF Start Code 2 5F 40 FF Stop Code 5B 40 FF Alt Set 80 9F Printable Control Code LAC Set Text Host Format Max Print Buffer Approx Orientn Override Control Width Print On Control By Host Disable Disable 13 2 inches Disable Off Left to Right Enable Enable Printer Width Enable Right to Left 180 Char Set Select from page 180 Primary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK 0892 OCRA 0893 OCR B 0424 Hebrew 0803 Hebrew Old 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 0875 Gr New Euro Char Set Select 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0256 Intern 1 1112 Balt Mult 0924 Euro Latin 9 1122 Estonian 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice 0500 Internat 5 Secondary Sets English US Austrian German Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Finnish Swedish French Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Spanish Twinax Params Factory Default Spanish Speak English UK Ol
41. 4 Power on the printer The printer will begin its boot up sequence 5 When the printer detects a valid SPX the control panel displays NEW SPX DETECTED PRESS ENTER NOTE If an error message displays find the message in the Message List in Chapter 7 and follow the troubleshooting instructions 6 Press the ENTER key to activate the reprogramming sequence The display will read PROGRAMMING PLEASE WAIT 7 When the security key is reprogrammed the display will read REMOVE USED SPX THEN PRESS ENTER 8 Remove the SPX from the debug port at the rear of the printer 308 How To Program The Security Key 9 Press the ENTER key The printer will reboot itself and you may resume normal printing 10 You may need to download a new program file to use the new feature 11 You may need to set additional menu parameters for any new features that have been added or enabled 309 Chapter 6 Reprogramming The Security Key 310 7 Troubleshooting Cleaning Requirements WARNING Clean the printer every six months or after every 1000 hours of operation whichever occurs first If the printer is located in a dusty area or is used for heavy duty printing clean it more often Disconnect the power source before cleaning the printer Vor dem Saubern des Druckers ist die Netzverbindung zu unterbrechen D branchez l alimentation avant de nettoyer l imprimante Desconecte la fuente de energia antes de lim
42. 40 to 70 C Relative Humidity Operating 15 to 80 noncondensing Storage 15 to 90 noncondensing 348 Electrical Characteristics Acoustic Noise Level Acoustic Noise Levels Pedestal per ISO 9296 Cabinet Modals Models Printing 50 dB 500 Ipm 1000 Ipm 65 dB 52 dB 1500 lpm 65 dB 54 dB 2000 lpm NA NA 6 8 Bel 8 0 Bel Standby 48 dB 50 dB 6 3 Bel 6 5 Bel Geraeuschemission nach ISO 9296 Druckend 52 dB 65 dB 52 dB 1500 lpm 65 dB 54 dB 2000 Ipm NA NA 6 8 Bel 8 0 Bel Betriebsbereit 48 dB 50 dB 6 3 Bel 6 5 Bel Energy Star The printers described in this User s Manual comply with the requirements of the ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program of the U S Environmental Protection Agency When in the reduced power idle state the printer displays Power Saver Mode Appendix A Electrical Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Voltage 10 Freq 10 Amps Watts BTU Hr P7005 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 3A 275W 940 AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 1 5A 275W 940 P7010 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 3 5V 300W 1025 AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 1 6A 300W 1025 P7015 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 4 5A 430W 1469 AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 1 9A 430W 1469 P7205 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 3 5A 350W 1195 AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 1 6A 350W 1195 P7210 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 3 5A 350W 1195 AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 1 6A 350S 1195 P7215 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 5A 460W 1571 AC 200 240V 50 60 H
43. 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek 6 English Sakr CP 714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 7 Dutch Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 8 French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 9 Spanish Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 10 Italian Arabic CP 1046 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO 11 Turkish Arabic Lam 1 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO 12 CP 437 Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 13 CP 850 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Hebrew Turkish Misc Sets Sets Sets Hebrew Old Data Gen Turk Unisys Turkish Block set 10cpi Hebrew New DEC Turkish NCR Turkish Italics Set Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish PST Turkish Scanblock 10cpi Latin 1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish PGL Thai Set Win CP 1255 PTT Turkish Code Page 853 IBC Turkish INFO Turkish Bull Turkish Win CP 1254 AS400 Turkish Code Page 857 165 Chapter 4 EMULATION EMULATION The EMULATION menu allows you to select the emulation to be used with your printer The Proprinter XL Epson FX P Series P Series XQ and Serial Matrix emulations are all part of LinePrinter You can configure options for the active emulation via the EMULATION menu Emulation options are further described in their corresponding Programmer s Reference Manual Factory Default Optional Emulation EMULATION from page 70
44. Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 Arabic CP 1046 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam 1 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Turkish Misc UTF 8 F Sets Sets Data Gen Turk Block set 10cpi DEC Turkish Italics Set IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish 225 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il 226 P Series Character Set Menu with PCL Il Character Set from page 220 IBM PC Primary Subset ASCII USA French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese French Canadian Latin American Danish II Spanish II Latin Am Il Extended Subset Code Page 437 Code Page 850 Extended Subset Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult OCR A OCR B Latin 2 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859 15 Polish POL1 DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT
45. DETECTED message 329 ETHERNET PARAMETERS menu ASCII data port 116 Ethernet speed 116 IPDS Data Port 116 Job Control 117 Keep alive timer 116 NetBIOS protocol 115 ETHERNET PARAMS menu 115 Ethernet speed Adapter Params menu 112 Ethernet speed Ethernet Parameters menu 116 Ethernet submenu 107 Buffer Size in K 106 107 ETX ACK ANSI Emulation menu 256 EVFU SPC Type 208 EXCESS RBN WEAR message 329 EXHAUST FAN FLT message 330 Expanded Font 141 157 Ext Execute Copy 136 Exterior cleaning 311 380 F Face CPI Delay PCL II Emulation 266 Fault messages 316 06 HOST REQUEST 317 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT 317 15 COMM CHECK 317 15V PWR FAIL 317 22 INVALID ADDR 317 23 5V PWR FAIL 317 31 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT 317 32 PAPER JAM TIMEOUT 318 33 PLATEN OPEN TIMEOUT 318 34 RIBBON STALL TIMEOUT 318 48V PWR FAIL 318 8 5V PWR FAIL 317 A TO D OVERUN 318 ACCESS NULL PTR 318 ACTIVATE LOST 319 B10 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED 319 B11 ERROR RAM TEST FAILED 319 B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING 319 B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE 319 B19 ERROR DC RETURNED 320 B20 STATUS 00 DOWNLOAD MODE 320 B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET 320 B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE 320 B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM 321 B30 STATUS INITIALZING 321 B35 STATUS WAITING FOR EC STATUS 321 B40 ERROR SDRAMEE PROM CKSUM BAD 321 B41 ERROR DIM MEMORY NOT SDRAM 321 B42 ERROR SDRAM ROWS NOT ALLOWED 321
46. Greek Sakr CP714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 Arabic CP 1046 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam 1 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Turkish Misc UTF 8 Sets Sets Data Gen Turk Block set 10cpi DEC Turkish Italics Set IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 235 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il Proprinter XL Emulation Factory Default Printer Protocol from page 209 Proprinter XL Define CR Code Define LF Code Auto LF FF valid at Character Alt Char TOF Set Set CR CR Enable LF LF Enable see page 239 Set 1 CR CR LF Disable LF CR LF Disable Set 2 20 CPI Condensed Enable Disable Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return
47. Guide 2 Figure 4 Printer Component Locations 26 3 Operating The Printer Powering On The Printer When you power on the printer it executes a self test The default power up state is online When the self test completes and the software has initialized successfully the status indicator light turns on indicating the printer is online The default value of the type of emulation you have installed appears upper right corner of the display The ribbon life remaining is shown on the second line If there is a fault during the self test the status indicator flashes and a specific fault message appears on the display such as LOAD PAPER The alarm also sounds if it is configured to do so See LCD Message Troubleshooting Table on page 317 for information on fault messages and solutions Operating Modes Online In online mode the printer can receive and print data sent from the host Pressing the ON LINE key toggles the printer from offline to online mode The status indicator is lit in online mode Offline In offline mode you can perform operator functions such as loading paper and setting top of form You can also move within the printer configuration menus Pressing the ON LINE key toggles the printer from online to offline mode The status indicator is off in offline mode Fault In fault mode a condition exists which must be cleared before printing can continue The status indicator flashes the alarm
48. Hebrew Old Hebrew and Farsi The default is Dual Case SCS System Network Architecture Character String mode is controlled by the host computer Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right e Control By Host default Allows printers configured as a 4234 to use the Set Text Orientation command from the host Left to Right e Right to Left When a right to left language is selected the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is placed online Coax Emulation Image Buf Size Allows you to select 2K or 4K as the image buffer size This option is valid only when the printer emulates the 3287 For the 4234 emulation the buffer size is fixed at 4K A POR status is sent to the host when the printer is placed online Intervention Req e Send to Host default The printer sends a signal to the host computer when a printer fault or hold mode time out occurs e Do Not Send No signal will be sent to the host computer Compatibility Op The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the non SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated CR At MPP 1 MPP is Maximum Print Position which is also known as line length This option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP 1 e On defaul
49. LF Overstrike Define LF 06 08 Code Code 8 0 LPI Elongated CR CR Disable Enable LF CR LF 10 3 LPI Backspace CR CR LF Enable Disable LF LF 6 0 LPI P Series EVFU Select Alt Set Character SFCC 80 9F Set 1 Enable Control Code see page 226 0 7F hex Disable Printable 220 P Series Emulation with LG P Series Emulation with LG Printer Protocol Factory Default from page 209 P Series Control Code Define CR Control Code Auto LF Overstrike Define LF 06 08 Code Code 8 0 LPI Elongated CR CR Disable Enable LF CR LF 10 3 LPI Backspace CR CR LF_ Enable Disable LF LF 6 0 LPI P Series EVFU Select Alt Set Character SFCC d SFCC 80 9F Set Command 1 Enable Control Code see page 227 Even dot plot 0 7F hex Disable Printable Double high Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 8 or 10 3 LPI Control Code 08 Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 BS You can define the code to output the following character e Elongated default e Backspace 221 222 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host com
50. MAC address 109 Subnet mask 109 ADAPTER PARAMS menu ASCII data port 112 Ethernet speed 112 IPDS Data Port 112 Job Control 113 Keep alive timer 112 Nest Serv Type 111 NetBIOS protocol 111 Novell frame 111 Novell protocol 111 ADVANCED USER menu 281 Alarm 286 Auto Elevator 284 Auto Locking 284 Cancel Key 287 Downloaded Fonts 283 File System 285 PMD Paper Motion Detection Fault 283 Power Saver Time 287 Power Stacker 284 Pwr Save Control 287 Set Lock Key 288 Set Sharing 285 372 Shuttle Timeout 286 Slow Paper Slew 286 Al 00 Spaces 138 158 Alarm ADVANCED USER menu 286 Alt Char Set Proprinter XL Emulation 238 Alt Set 80 9F 174 223 Epson FX Emulation 243 PTX Transparent 183 Serial Matrix Emulation 234 ANSI Emulation menu 248 Auto LF 253 Barcode Darkmode 256 BC Check Digit 255 Character Set 254 CPI LPI Select 250 Define CR Code 253 Define LF Code 253 ESC c Sequence 254 ETX ACK 256 Font Attributes 250 Page Format 251 Pos on BC OvrSz 255 Printer Select 254 Private Mode 255 PUM Default 256 Received CR 255 Received DEL 255 Reset Cmd CFG Ld 254 Truncate PI Slew 256 Append Rotated 155 ASCII Character Set 353 ASCII data port Adapter Params menu 112 ASCII data port Ethernet Parameters menu 116 ASCII data port WLAN Parameters menu 120 Auth Method WLAN LEAP menu 123 Auto Elevator ADVANCED USER menu 284 Auto FF at PN 160 Auto LF 222 ANSI Emulat
51. New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 Arabic CP 1046 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam 1 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Turkish Misc UTF 8 Sets Sets Data Gen Turk Block set 10cpi DEC Turkish Italics Set IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 244 Character Set from page 244 Standard Sets Epson Set ASCII USA French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am French Canadian Latin Am Il OCR A OCR B Multinational ASCII USA EBCDIC Code Page 850 CP 858 EURO IBM PC Epson FX Emulation Factory Default 245 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il E
52. PGL will select e Scalable default These expanded characters have rounded edges e Block These are block characters compatible with the IGP X00 printers e Alt Block 1 Alt Block 2 Reserved block sets used only for compatibility purposes 141 Chapter 4 142 IGP PGL Emulation Scalable Size e Normal default Controls the size of scalable characters to be either normal size as set by the user or adjusted to match the size of block fonts This is the default e Block Adjusts the size of scalable characters to exactly match its block font alternative True Form Slew This option is related to slewing within forms when using the PMODE command Customers with new applications are advised to keep this option enabled e Enable default Form length is accurate according to the form length parameter in the CREATE command e Disable Form length is IGP X00 compatible when using PMODE Printer PI Line This option enables the IGP to send PI instructions to the printer to slew the form e Enable default Send the PI instructions to the printer LinePrinter Plus during form slew This is GP X00 compatible e Disable Do not send PI instructions to the printer LFs are sent instead IGP PGL Submenu Print Quality e Data Processing default The emulation prints at 60 x 72 dpi and lets you choose between normal alphanumerics and barcodes and dark mode alphanumerics and barcodes This mode should b
53. Params Char Set Select from page 187 Factory Default Primary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0285 English UK 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0287 Danish Alt 0278 Finnish 0288 Finn Alt 0297 French 0500 Internat 5 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0289 Span 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0803 Hebrew Old 0424 Hebrew 0892 ORCA 0893 ORC B 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 0875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Katak 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 188 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0905 Turk Old 0256 Intern 1 0924 Euro Lat 9 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice Secondary Sets English US English UK German German Alt Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Danish Alt Finnish Swedish Finnish Alt French International Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Portug Alt Spanish Spanish Alt Spanish Speak Swiss Fren Ger Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Turkish Old Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian 3270 Params Translation Tbl Prints out a table of the Coax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the TN3270 interface is the current inter
54. Quality Print Quality IGP VGL emulation Select High See page 148 for the IGP VGL Configuration Menu and see page 157 for a written description of Print Quality Optimizing Print Speed Optimizing Print Speed LP IGP PGL and IGP VGL Emulations The printer has been configured at the factory for optimal print speed To optimize print quality instead you can change values for specific configuration parameters such as Barcode Quality and Print Quality Doing so however will decrease the printer speed If you have optimized the printer for print quality you can change it to optimal speed by selecting the values as follows e Bar Code Quality Printer Control menu Select Draft See page 70 for the Configuration Main Menu and see page 279 for a written description of Bar Code Quality e Print Quality IGP PGL emulation Select Dataprocessing See page 129 for the IGP PGL Configuration Menu and see page 143 for a written description of Print Quality e Print Quality IGP VGL emulation Select Dataprocessing See page 148 for the IGP VGL Configuration Menu and see page 157 for a written description of Print Quality Coax Twinax Emulation You can increase print speed by selecting the Enable mode for the Early Print Complete configuration parameter in the Coax Twinax Emulation However if an error occurs while in Enable mode you may lose data For more information refer to Earl
55. RBN WEAR 329 EXHAUST FAN FLT 330 FIRMWARE ERROR 330 FM HEADER ERROR 330 FRAMING ERROR 330 FREEFORM OFF 331 FREEFORM ON OFF HOLD KEY PWRUP 331 GRF CHECK ERROR PRESS STOP 331 HAM COIL OPEN 331 HAMMER COIL BAD 331 HB NOT INSTALLD 331 HMR BANK FAN FLT 332 ILL EXT BUS ACC 332 ILLGL OPR ACCSS 332 INCOMPAT E NET 332 INTAKE FAN FAULT 332 INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00 333 INVALID ACTIVATE 333 INVALID COMMAND 333 LO DRV SHORT 333 LOAD PAPER 333 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX 333 LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH 334 NEW SPX DETECTED 334 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED 334 OLD RIBBON 334 ON LINE 334 ONLINE 28 CU NOT ENAB 334 ONLINE 8344 FAILED 334 ONLINE CU TIMED OUT 335 PAP BAD TABLE 335 PAP BSY TOO LNG 335 PAP FIFO OVEREL 335 PAP FIFO UNDRFL 335 PAP ILLGL ST 335 PAP INCMPL ENER 335 PAP INVLD CMD 335 PAP INVLD PARM 335 PAP NOT SCHED 336 PAP NT AT SPEED 336 PAP UNEXP INT 336 PARAMETER ERROR 336 PARITY ERROR 336 PLAT INV CMD 336 PLAT INV PARM 336 PLAT INV STATE 336 PLEASE WAIT RESET IN PROGRESS 337 POWER SAVER MODE 337 POWERSUPPLY HOT 337 PRINTER HOT 337 PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL 337 PROTECTED INSTR 338 PWRSUPP VOLT 338 QUEUE OVERRUN 338 RBN AT END POINT 339 RBN SENSOR ERROR 338 REMOVE USED SPX 338 RESTORING BOOT CODE 338 RIB INVLD CMD 338 RIB INVLD STATE 339 RIBBON DRIVE 339 RIBBON NOT RECOGNIZED
56. The first 15 characters of the LEAP password maximum number of characters is 32 LEAP Password 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the LEAP password maximum number of characters is 32 LEAP Password 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the LEAP password maximum number of characters is 32 Reset LEAP Password Resets the LEAP password to an empty string ACTIVE IGP EMUL ACTIVE IGP EMUL IMPORTANT Factory Default ACTIVE IGP EMUL from page 70 IGP PGL IGP VGL not shown if any below are installed ANSI if installed PCL II if installed LG if installed LP with any above This ACTIVE IGP EMUL function allows you to activate the desired emulation There are two methods for selecting the desired emulation The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the printer menu The second is by sending a host command which will switch the emulation automatically See the appropriate Programmer s Reference Manual for details When changing from one emulation to the other the printer will load the power up configuration and the new emulation parameters Any configuration settings performed before selecting these emulations that are not saved in NVRAM will be lost To configure an IGP emulation the IGP emulation must be selected in the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu The IGP emulation that is not selected will not appear in the EMULATION menu see Main Menu on page 70 125 Chapter 4 IGP PGL
57. To Return displays While in this position pressing the UP or DOWN arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1 72 inch increments Refer to the Up and Down key functions for additional details on the microstep feature When the VIEW EJECT key is pressed a second time the printer will move the paper to enable printing on the next available form CANCEL In offline mode this key cancels all data in the print buffer if enabled in ADVANCED USER on page 281 The print buffer is cleared without printing any of the data and the current paper position is set as the top of form If this function is disabled the CANCEL key will be ignored NOTE Use of this key will cause loss of data SET TOF Sets the top of form on the printer This key is active only when the printer is offline and will not operate if the printer is in a fault condition The paper moves down to the print position and aligns to the top of form Refer to the Quick Setup Guide for complete instructions on how to set the top of form NOTE If there is any data in the buffer the paper will move to the last print position PRT CONFIG In offline mode PRT CONFIG prints the current short configuration This key requires a confirmation with the ENTER key pressing any other key will exit from this function See The Configuration Menus on page 53 for an explanation of configuration menus Control Panel Keys JOB SELECT In offline mode this key allows you to
58. VGL Font Set Menu 165 386 IGP VGL submenu 148 Error Handling 161 Font Set 163 Graphics Options 155 Ignore DB8 Setup 162 LG 152 LPI 154 PCL II 150 PI Control 163 Prt to Emulate 164 SFCC amp Pwrup 154 IGP110 Compatbl 160 ILL EXT BUS ACC message 332 ILLGL OPR ACCSS message 332 Image Buf Size 175 202 INCOMPAT E NET message 332 Ink Saver Mode PRINTER CONTROL 289 INTAKE FAN FAULT message 332 Integrated Print Management System 15 48 Darker Print 48 Lighter Print 48 Interface Type Serial submenu 99 Interfaces printer 293 specifications 351 Interior cleaning 312 INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00 message 333 Intervention Req 175 203 Intervention Req 3270 Params menu 191 INVALID ACTIVATE message 333 INVALID COMMAND message 333 IP address Adapter Address menu 109 Ethernet Address menu 113 WLAN Address menu 117 IPDS Data Port Adapter Params menu 112 IPDS Data Port Ethernet Parameters menu 116 IPDS Data Port WLAN Parameters menu 120 IPDS Emulation 257 Barcode Quality 259 Barcode Size 260 Barcode Speed 260 Code Page Subset 262 Default Code Page 261 Default Font 262 Early Print Comp Complete 260 Font Size 259 Graphic CharSize 261 Graphics Quality 259 Graphics Scaling 261 Hexdump Mode 262 2 5 Checksum 261 Print IPDS Fonts 262 Print Quality 259 VPA Check 262 Index J Job Control Adapter Params menu 113 Job Control Eth
59. a right to left language is selected the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online 5250 Params Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings e Disable default Allows these host commands to override operator panel settings line length forms length lines per inch LPI characters per inch CPI print quality and text orientation Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option e Enable The operator panel settings override the host commands Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Disable default Reflects distance generated by the VGL feature PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed e Enable Max Print Width Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C T host interface Set for 13 2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the printer All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated e 13 2 Inches default e Printer Width the maximum width of the printer 201 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation SPC Coax
60. and NL 3287 only 177 194 CR LG Emulation 273 CTL VOLT FAIL message 325 Custom configurations 55 Customer Support Center 20 D Darker print Integrated Print Management System 48 Data Bit 8 163 Centronics Parallel submenu 91 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines submenu 95 Data Carrier Detect DCD RS 232 306 Data Lines 1 through 8 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 297 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 295 Data Polarity Centronics Parallel submenu 92 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines submenu 95 Data Protocol Serial submenu 99 Data Set Ready DSR RS 232 306 Index Data Strobe Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 297 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 295 Data Term Ready Serial submenu 103 Data Terminal Ready DTR RS 232 306 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines submenu Auto Trickle 96 Buffer Size in K 96 Data Bit 8 95 Data Polarity 95 Latch Data On 95 PI Ignored 95 Prime Signal 96 Resp Polarity 95 TOF Action 96 Trickle Time 96 Dataproducts Standard submenu 94 Dataproducts Parallel Interface 294 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 295 Buffer Clear 295 Cable Verify 295 Data Lines 1 through 8 295 Data Strobe 295 Demand Data Request 295 Online 295 Paper Instruction Pl 295 Parity Error 295 Ready 295 377 Index Default Code Page IPDS Emulation 261 Default configurations 55 Default Font IPDS Em
61. as blank spaces FF Validity Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution e Off default Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line or at Maximum Print Position 1 A form feed command at any other position is recognized as a space e On Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the data stream Coax Emulation Auto Skip At End Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a print buffer If form feed is the last character in the print order the form feed function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option e Off default Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next form FF After Job Determines the print position after an operator initiated local copy print screen function e Off default Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print buffer unless a new line form feed or carriage return command was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the first line on the next form CR EM and NL 3287 only CR Carriage Return EM Error Message and NL New Line specify that the printer treat the C
62. as lowercase and prints uppercase characters received from the computer as uppercase e Enable Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as their corresponding uppercase equivalents uppercase characters received from the computer print as uppercase Slew Relative Slewing is rapid vertical paper movement This parameter determines the number of lines slewed either 1 15 lines or 1 16 lines when an EVFU Slew Relative command is received The options include e 1 16 Lines default e 1 15 Lines 231 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il Serial Matrix Emulation Factory Default Printer Protocol from page 209 Serial Matrix Control Code Define CR Auto LF Overstrike Define LF Printer 06 Code Code Select 8 0 LPI CR CR Enable Enable LF LF Disable 10 3 LPI CR CR LF Disable Disable LF CR LF Enable 6 0 LPI Alt Set Character ESC d 80 9F Set command Control Code Printable see page 235 Even dot plot Double high Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 8 or 10 3 LPI 232 Serial Matrix Emulation Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time t
63. asserts the DTR signal On Line and BNF buffer not full Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full Off Line or BF buffer full Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full On Line Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online False Never asserts the DTR signal Request To Send This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Request to Send RTS signal is generated This signal indicates whether or not the printer is ready to receive data On Line and BNF default Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full Off Line or BF Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full On Line Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online False Never asserts the RTS signal True Continuously asserts the RTS signal 103 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE 104 Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port buffer You may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments NOTE If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater you may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance Poll Character This option is for the Series1 protocol Whenever the printer receives this character it sends a response to the host indicating the
64. board does not match code of firmware on the controller board 339 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User 340 movement or shuttle moving at wrong speed Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution SECURITY KEY No The security key is Contact your authorized failed SENDING No Status message No action is required PROGRAM the printer is TO EC loading the engine PROCESSOR controller program into the engine controller SHUTL INV CMD No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board SHUTL INV PARM No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board SHUTL OVR No The shuttle is Contact your authorized SPEED running over service representative speed SHUTTLE JAM Yes No shuttle Check for obstruction to shuttle a twisted ribbon or platen lever closed too tightly If fault source is not apparent contact your authorized service representative Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution SHUTTLE STALL Yes The shuttle is not Set the platen lever to moving match the thickness of paper but not too tightly Check and adjust the platen gap Inspect the ribbon mask for deformation that snags and interferes with shutt
65. by host Data transferred from host to printer When printer sends data two types are available If Nibble mode signal is set high If Byte mode signal is set low Data 1 through Data 8 These pins are host driven in Compatibility mode and bidirectional in Byte mode They are not used in Nibble mode Data 1 is the least significant bit Data 8 is the most significant bit Printer Clock Peripheral Clock Interrup Driven by the printer A signal from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer Printer Busy Peripheral Acknowledge nWait Driven by the printer Indicates the printer cannot receive data Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble mode Acknowledge Data Request nAcknowledge Reverse Driven by the printer Indicates the printer is in a fault condition Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble mode Xflag Driven by the printer A high true level indicating the printer is ready for data transfer and the printer is on line Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble mode Host Busy Host Acknowledge NDStrobe Driven by the host Activates auto line feed mode Peripheral Logic High Driven by the printer When the line is high the printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state When the line is low the printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state nReverse Request Driven by the host Resets the interface and forces a return to
66. current state of the printer see Series1 protocol It may be configured from 0 through FF hexadecimal Poll Response This option is for the Series1 protocol After receiving a poll character the printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the response It may be configured from 0 through 30 Idle Response This option is for the Series1 protocol e Disable default e Enable The printer will send a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size Serial Submenu One Char Enquiry The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from the host and sends a response back to the host This option also allows you to turn on and off this feature Table 5 One Char Enquiry Response Characters Printer State Response hex Online and Buffer Not Full 22 Online and Buffer Full 23 Offline and Buffer Not Full 20 Offline and Buffer Full 21 The Poll Character is removed from the data stream If the Data Protocol is set to ETX ACK ACK NAK or Series 1 One Char Enquiry is automatically disabled Framing Errors Possible errors that can occur when the printer s serial interface settings do not match those of the host computer e Enable default If a framing error occurs a fault message will display on the control panel e Disable If a framing error occurs a fault message wil
67. data in the range of hex 80 through hex OF e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code Graphic Chek Err Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA Set Graphic Error Action command For more information about the SGEA command refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual e Enable default The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors the printer will stop when a graphic error is detected e Disable Ignores the SGEA command from the host The printer does not stop when an error is detected instead it substitutes the character selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter 199 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 200 Graphic Chek Cod Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable character that is received from the host Choose a hex character from 40 through FE The character becomes the printer default when e The printer is powered off and then powered on e An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default e The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled The value can be the following e 60 default e 40 F4 Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right e Left to Right default e Right to Left When
68. from the printer without the prior written consent of Printronix Inc d You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the Software Product e You may not transmit the Software Product over a network by telephone or electronically using any means or reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the Software f You agree to keep confidential and use your best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software Product from unauthorized disclosure or use 3 Transfer You may transfer the Software Product with the printer but only if the recipient agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement Your license is automatically terminated if you transfer the Software Product and printer Limited Software Product Warranty Printronix Inc warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix Inc Printronix Inc does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions Remedy Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix Inc in connection with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the same version and revision level Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies 1 THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED Printronix Inc does not warran
69. in order to service the other ports Report Status e Disable default When a fault occurs on the printer only the active port reports the fault to the host e Enable The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu Factory Default IEEE 1284 from page 85 Prime Signal TOF Action Buffer Size in K Auto Trickle Trickle Time Offline Process Enable Disable Reset Do Nothing 16 1 16 Disable Enable 1 4 sec 1 2 sec Disable Enable 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off The IEEE 1284 interface is faster and more versatile than Centronics and supports bidirectional communication Configuration of this interface is controlled from the host Refer to IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface on page 298 more details about the available modes Compatibility Nibble and Byte 88 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu Prime Signal e Disable default The parallel port will not perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal e Enable The parallel port will perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal TOF Action e Reset default A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled e Do Not
70. not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport Offline Process e Disable the default When set to disable the printer does not process parallel network data while offline e Enable When set to enable the printer continues to process but not print the current network parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer s buffer is full Centronics Parallel Submenu Centronics Parallel Submenu Factory Default Centronics from page 85 Data Bit 8 PI Ignored Data Resp Busy on Latch Data Polarity Polarity Strobe On Enable Enable Standard Standard Enable Leading Disable Disable Inverted Inverted Disable Trailing Prime TOF Action Buffer Size Auto Trickle Signal in K Trickle Time Enable Reset 16 Disable 1 4 sec Disable Do Nothing 1 16 Enable 1 2 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off Data Bit 8 e Enable default Allows access to the extended ASCII character set e Disable The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a zero regardless of its actual setting 91 92 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE PI Ignored The PI Paper Instruction signal is used to control vertical paper motion e Enable default Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control codes e Disab
71. on page 83 NOTE Once you change active emulations any changes to the previously selected emulation will be gone unless they have been saved 61 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview 62 Example 1 This example shows how to save a configuration as a numbered configuration then later print it Step Press LCD Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on 2 ON LINE CLEAR OFFLINE GS CONFIG CONTROL 3 ENTER SWITCH Allows you to make lt A gt UNLOCKED configuration changes OFFLINE QUICK SETUP 4 OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL UNTIL 5 CONFIG CONTROL aS Load Config 6 CONFIG CONTROL Save Config UNTIL 7 Save Config 1 Saving Your New Configuration ENTER CONFIG CONTROL Step Press LCD Notes 8 Save Config Cycle through the 2 choices OR 9 ENTER Save Config The indicates this choice O 2 is active NOTE We recommend that you print the configuration To print the configuration go to Step 9 To skip this procedure and resume printer operation go to Step 14 10 CONFIG CONTROL lt hy Save Config 11 CONFIG CONTROL Print Config UNTIL 12 Print Config LI gt Current 13 Print Config Press until the desired 2 parameter displays OR 14 OFFLINE The selected configuration is printed 63 64 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press LCD Notes 15 ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key
72. on the control panel flashes on and off and the message display indicates the specific fault Fault messages are summarized in Table 15 Displayed faults fall into one of two categories e Operator correctable e Field service required For the operator correctable faults follow the suggested solution in Table 15 After correcting the displayed fault press the CLEAR key to clear the error message and status indicator and resume printing If the fault message reappears contact your authorized service representative NOTE The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and procedures for resolving fault conditions However many of the procedures described there must be performed only by your authorized service representative Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention If a fault is not correctable by the operator the fault message is followed by an asterisk This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is needed You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized service representative 1 Set the printer power switch to O Off wait 15 seconds then turn the printer on again Run your print job again If the message does not appear it was a false indication and no further attention is required 2 If the message reappears press the CLEAR key If the message disappears it was a false indication and no further attention is required If the message reappears call your
73. page 117 WLAN 108 PARAMS 3 WLAN Kerberos 4 WLAN LEAP See page 119 See page 121 See page 123 1 Only if the Ethernet Adapter feature is installed 2 Only if the Integrated Ethernet feature is installed 3 Only if the Wireless Adapter feature is installed 4 Only if a Symbol radio card is installed 5 Only if a Cisco radio card is installed ADAPTER ADDRESS ADAPTER ADDRESS ADAPTER ADDRESS from page 108 Factory Default IP Address Subnet Gateway MAC DHCP Mask Address Address XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX hhhhhhhhhhhh Disable Enable IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only 109 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for
74. print than m Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents giving text a typeset appearance This example is printed with proportional spacing enabled Bold Print e Disable Text is printed normally e Enable Text is printed with a heavy line thickness 250 ANSI Emulation Slashed Zero This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable Zero is printed without a slash e Enable Zero is printed with a slash Page Format Margins e Left Margin Defines where the first print column is located The left margin is specified as the number of characters from the left edge of the form e Right Margin Defines where the last print column is located The right margin is specified as the number of characters from the right edge of the form e Top Margin Defines the location of the first print line on the page The top margin is specified as the number of lines from the top of the form s position Bottom Margin Defines the location of the last print line on the page The bottom margin is specified as the number of lines from the bottom of the form s position Form Length Specifies the form length in lines The maximum form length in lines depends on the current LPI setting it is equal to the maximum form length in inches multiplied by the current LPI setting For example
75. printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Form Feed code occurs This can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer e FF default Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be the current print position of the next form e CR FF Performs an automatic carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next form Unsolicited Rpt This option enables or disables Printer Device Status Reports to be sent to the host when a reportable status or error condition has occurred e No default Disables all unsolicited status reports from the printer e Small Enables brief unsolicited status reports and sends an extended status report to the host Big Enables extended unsolicited status reports and sends an extended status report to the host Print Mode Opt When enabled this option affects the SPI SHS and DECSHORP commands The printer will no longer be forced into these commands and print speed improves significantly when in portrait orientation For SHS and DECSHORP the character size will change with the selected pitch In addition SGR attributes such as bold crossed out and italics will be done in print mode with greater efficiency e Disable default Disables the fpirnt mode option This provides compatibility with older LG printer products
76. put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed e Disable Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed PTX Transparent Lead in Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard Coax emulations To access these features send text commands in the data stream The commands must have a start and end code Four sets are available e Set1 start code lt stop code gt e Set 2 start code stop code e Set3 start code _ stop code _ e User Defined 173 174 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Usr Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 5F e Start Code 2 5F Stop Code 5B Alt Set 80 9F e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code Change Case Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case This option is available only in non SCS mode The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed online Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of the following right to left sets Katak
77. range is 1023 65535 and the factory default is 5001 Keep Alive Timer This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run With the Keep Alive Timer on the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated e 3 Minutes default e 2 10 Minutes WLAN KERBEROS WLAN KERBEROS Factory Default WLAN 1 Only if a Symbol radio card is installed Kerberos from page 108 Kerberos Kerberos Reset Kerberos KDC Port Enable Password Password Number Disable Kerberos Password 01 15 88 Enable Kerberos Password 16 30 0 65535 Kerberos Password 31 40 Ticket Lifetime Clock Skew Renew Lifetime Clock Skew Units Ticket Lifetime Units Renew Lifetime Units Seconds Seconds Seconds 300 43200 o 60 900 300 259200 0 604800 Minutes Minutes Minutes 5 720 0 1 15 5 4320 0 10080 Clock Skew Sec Hours Hours 300 12 0 1 72 0 168 Days Days 1 0 1 3 0 7 Ticket Lifetime Sec Renew Lifetime Sec 43200 o Kerberos Enable e Disable the default Disables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface e Enable Enables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface 121 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU 122 Kerberos Password e Kerberos Password 01 15 The first 15 characters of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 e Kerberos Password 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the Kerberos password maximum numbe
78. rendering Flash Avail The number of non volatile Flash memory bytes available for the printer Flash File System 5 Overview Interfaces This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer The printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs into the printer The interface processes all communications signals and data to and from the host computer Plus with the Auto Switching feature you can configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time see Auto Switching Submenu on page 86 This chapter describes the interfaces provided with the printer Standard Host Interfaces e Centronics parallel e EEE 1284 parallel bidirectional e High Speed Serial Port RS 232 RS 422 NOTE RS 422 is optional Optional Host Interfaces e Coax Twinax e Dataproducts Long Lines e Dataproducts parallel e Ethernet 10 100BaseT In addition to descriptions for the multi line interfaces this chapter also provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel interfaces 293 Chapter 5 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Dataproducts Parallel Interface Table 8 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Connector Pin Assignments with a 50 pin AMP HDH 20 Data Cable Connector Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin DATA LINE 1 19 READY 22 CABLE VERIFY 45 46 Return 3 Return 6 DATA LINE 2 20 O
79. the appropriate setting The options include e Disable default e Enable ADAPTER Factory Default PARAMS from page 108 Novell Nest Serv NetBIOS Novell ASCII Protocol Type Protocol Frame Data Port Enable Auto Enable Auto Sensing 9100 Disable Bindery Disable Ethernet II 1023 65535 NDS Ethernet 802 3 Ethernet 802 2 802 2 Snap E IPDS Keep Alive __ Ethernet Job Control Data Port Timer Speed 5001 3 Minutes Auto Select Standard 1023 65535 2 10 Minutes 10 Half Duplex Enhanced 110 10 Full Duplex Off 100 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex You may enable or disable the Novell or NetBIOS Protocols within this menu as well as selecting which Novell Frame scheme to use in processing Novell signals See the Novell chapter in the Network Interface Card User s Manual for more details ADAPTER PARAMS Novell Protocol This option determines whether the Novell protocol will be available The selections are as indicated below e Enable default Makes the Novell protocol available with the ethernet installed e Disable Makes the Novell protocol unavailable during printer operation Nest Serv Type You can change the Nest Server using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options are Bindery the factory default NDS and Auto NetBIOS Protocol This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be
80. to Right e Right to Left Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings e Disable default Allows the following host commands to override operator panel settings line length forms length lines per inch LPI characters per inch CPI print quality and text orientation Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option e Enable The operator panel settings override the host commands NOTE Host margin and tab settings will take precedence whether or not Host Override is enabled 185 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Disable default Reflects distance generated by the IGP VGL feature IGP PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Enable Does not reflect distance generated by the IGP VGL feature IGP PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after absolute and relative move commands are executed Max Print Width Set the maximum print width at either 13 2 inches or the maximum width of the printer The default is 13 2 inches Buf
81. within that group such as Roman 8 and press ENTER Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual 237 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il Alt Char Set This option determines if data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F should be interpreted as a control code or as a printable character e Set 1 default Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Set 2 Prints data for the characters at hex locations 03 04 05 06 15 and 80 through 9F 20 CPI Condensed Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page e Enable default Prints characters about 60 percent the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer e Disable Does not compress print widths even if condensed print is chosen by the host 238 Character Set from page 236 Proprinter XL Emulation Proprinter XL Character Set Menu Factory Default Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Hebrew Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Gr
82. 1 line e 16 A paper slew of 0 15 will move 1 16 lines CR Edit This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed e Disable default The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by line feeds e Enable The printer processes all carriage returns even for those that are not followed by line feeds Select Font Select Font specifies which language is currently selected for use with the PGL Refer to IGP PGL Font Set Menu on page 145 for available selections Slash 0 This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable default Zero is printed without a slash e Enable Zero is printed with a slash IGP PGL Submenu Select LPI This is the number of lines to be printed per inch For example at 6 Ipi there is 1 6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line The options are e 6 0 default e 8 0 9 0 e 10 0 Auto Uppercase This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using the ALPHA command e Disable default The printer will print text in upper and lowercase e Enable The printer will print text in uppercase only Skip Cmd Prefix This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL command is received e Enable default The printer ignores all data on the cur
83. 3 Operational Procedures Paper Power Stacker Figure 17 Removing Stacked Paper from the Printer 6 For cabinet models remove the stacked paper from the rear cabinet floor For cabinet models with the power stacker installed remove the paper from the wire paper tent and press the STACKER DOWN key to lower the stacker mechanism 7 Close the cabinet rear door 46 Unload Paper Tractors Doors 2 Platen Lever Figure 18 Completely Removing the Paper 8 To completely remove the paper from the printer a Raise the platen lever as far as it will go and open both tractor doors CAUTION Be careful when pulling any paper backward through the paper path especially when using a label stock If you are not careful labels can detach and adhere to the printer within the paper path where only an authorized service representative can remove them b Open the cabinet front door c Gently pull the paper down through the paper slot Allow the paper to fall into the paper supply area d Remove the paper from the paper supply area 47 Chapter 3 Integrated Print Management System Integrated Print Management System 48 The P7000 s Integrated Print Management System feature automatically monitors and communicates the status of the ribbon s life to help the operator know when to change ribbons Using a special bar coded spool the P7000 automatically detects when a new or
84. 5 Paper Out Dots DIAGNOSTICS 291 Paper specifications 346 Parallel Interface Centronics 296 Dataproducts 294 PARAMETER ERROR message 336 Parameter settings changing 54 saving 54 Parameters changing example 57 Parity Error Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 295 PARITY ERROR message 336 Parity Serial submenu 102 PCL II Emulation 263 Config Print 268 Display Functions 266 Face CPI Delay 266 Graphics Density 266 Line Terminator 266 LPI Adjust 267 Max Line Width 265 Page L Inches 268 Page L Lines 267 Page Length Rep 265 Perforation Skip 266 Primary Char Set 265 PTX Linefeed 267 Reset Cmd CFG Ld 268 Second Char Set 265 Symbol Set Print 268 Perforation Skip PCL II Emulation 266 PGL SFCC 77 133 PI Control 163 Host PI 164 Max PI 16 164 Printer PI 163 PI Ignored Centronics Parallel submenu 92 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines submenu 95 PI Slew Range 134 PLAT INV CMD message 336 PLAT INV PARM message 336 PLAT INV STATE message 336 PLEASE WAIT RESET IN PROGRESS message 337 Plot Mode Opt LG Emulation 275 PMD Paper Motion Detection Fault ADVANCED USER 283 Poll Character Serial submenu 104 Index Poll Response Serial submenu 104 Port Type Auto Switching submenu 87 Pos on BC OvrSz ANSI Emulation menu 255 Position Aft FF 4234 only 176 192 Power Consumption 350 Power On IGP PGL 136 Power requirements 21 POWER SAVER
85. 5 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits Printronix is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Fules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures European Union EU Conformity Statement Hereby Printronix declares that this C p
86. 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 PC851 LtGk 12G Greek 7 12N Greek 8 8G Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Factory Default P Series Emulation P Series Character Set Menu with LG Character Set from page 220 IBM PC Primary Subset ASCII USA French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese French Canadian Latin American Danish II Spanish II Latin Am Il Extended Subset Code Page 437 Code Page 850 Multinational ASCII USA EBCDIC ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset ASCII USA German Swedish Danish Norweigian Finnish English Dutch French Spanish Italian Turkish Japanese Extended Subset Multinational Barcode 10 CPI Mult DP 10 CPI Mult DP 12 CPI Mult LQ 10 CPI Greek DP 10 CPI Greek DP 12 CPI Greek LQ 10 CPI Grap DP 10 CPI Grap LQ 10 CPI Sci DP 10 CPI Sci DP 12 CPI Sci LQ 10 CPI Factory Default DEC Mult ASCII USA French German English Norw Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese French Canadian Dutch Finnish Swiss OCR A OCR B Latin 2 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859 15 CP 858 Euro 227 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il Printer Protocol from page 209 P Series XQ Emulation Factory Default P Series xQ Control Code Define CR Auto LF Define LF Compressed Elong Alt 06 Code Code Font 8 0 LPI CR C
87. A 6B C 4D nopqrstuvwxyz i 6E F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D TMEBAR Ct 7E 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 BA 2B 2C 2D 2E 0123456789 lt gt 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 7 ABCDEFGHIJ 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A OD OA 23 24 he Clee 01234 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 54789 lt gt 7 ABCD 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 EFGHIJKLMNOPGRST 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 UVWXYZENI _ abcd 55 56 57 58 59 SA 5B 5C SD SE SF 60 41 62 63 64 efghijkimnopqrst 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E amp F 70 71 72 73 74 uvuxyztik 6 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 20 21 22 23 24 25 amp 012345 26 27 28 29 BA 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 6789 lt gt 7 ABCDE 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D SE 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 FGHIJK 4 amp 46 47 48 49 4A 4B OD OA 24 25 26 27 2B 29 BA 2B gt 0123456789 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A B lt gt P ABCDEFGHIVK 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B LMNOPGRSTUVWXYZEC 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 5B 59 SA SB i _ abcdefghijk 5C 5D SE 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 47 68 6 6A 4B Imnopqrstuvwxyzt 6C 6D 6E amp F 70 7i 72 73 74 75 765 77 78 79 7A 7B 125 I eZR 7O e 7C 7D 7E 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C Figure 27 Hex Dump Sample 315 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems 316 Fault Messages If a fault condition occurs in the printer the status indicator
88. AR Partner Printronix has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency NOTE The ENERGY STAR emblem does not represent EPA endorsement of any product or service Product Recycling and Disposal This unit may have lead containing materials such as circuit boards and connectors that require special handling Before this unit is disposed of these materials must be removed and recycled or discarded according to applicable regulations This book contains specific information on batteries and refrigerant where applicable This product may contain a sealed lead acid battery lithium battery nickel metal hydride battery or nickel cadium battery Batteries of these types must be recycled or disposed of properly Recycling facilities may not be available in your area In the United States Printronix has established a collection process for reuse recycling or proper disposal of used batteries and battery packs from Printronix equipment For information on proper disposal of the batteries in this product please contact Printronix For information on disposal of batteries outside the United States contact your local waste disposal facility 359 Appendix C Communication Statements Communication Statements 360 Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement This equpment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 1
89. ATION from page 166 Factory Default PCL Il Primary Char Second Char Page Length Max Line Face CPI Set Set Rep Width Delay ID ID Inches Page 13 2 inches Enable 0 109 xx 0 109 xx Lines Page 13 6 inches Disable Symbol Set Symbol Set See next page See next page Pitch Pitch 10 12 13 3 10 12 13 3 Density Density Data Processing Data Processing NLQ NLQ OCR A OCR A OCR B OCR B High Speed High Speed Symbol Set Graphics Perforation Display Line Delay Density Skip Functns Terminator Disable 60 DPI Disable Disable LF After CR Enable 70 DPI Enable Enable CR After LF CR After FF CR After VT PTX LPI Adjust Page L Lines Page L Inches Linefeed aa Disable 6 LPI 66 Lines 11 0 Inches Enable 8 LPI 12 96 Lines 263 Chapter 4 PCL II Emulation PCL II Continued a Config Print Symbol Set Reset Cmd Print CFG Ld Current Config Factory Config Disable Power Up Config Primary Secondary Char set Char Set from previous from previous page page Roman 8 8U OCR A 00 Math 8 8M same as Primary Turkish 8 8T OCR B 10 PS Math 5M Character Set Arab 8 8V ISO Swe Fin 0S Greek 7 12N Cyrillic 8R ISO Spain 1S Postnet4 15Y PC858 MtLi 13U ISO Italian 0l Postnet11 25 MC Text 12J ISO Po
90. Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options include e Disable default e Enable WLAN PARAMS WLAN Factory Default PARAMS from page 108 NetBIOS ASCII IPDS Data Keep Alive Ethernet Protocol Data Port Port Timer Speed Enable 9100 5001 3 Minutes Auto Select Disable 1023 65535 1023 65535 2 10 Minutes 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex Job Control Standard Enhanced Off For information on assigning the IP Address Gateway Address Subnet Mask and MAC Address refer to the Network Interface Card User s Manual NetBIOS Protocol This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be available The selections are as indicated below e Enable default Makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the ethernet installed e Disable Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer operation 119 120 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU ASCII Data Port This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs The data port number needs to match your host system setting e 9100 default e 1023 65535 IPDS Data Port This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the IPDS option is installed The
91. COMM CHECK message 317 15V PWR FAIL message 317 20 CPI Condensed Epson FX Emulation 243 Proprinter XL Emulation 238 22 INVALID ADDR message 317 23 5V PWR FAIL message 317 31 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT message 317 32 PAPER JAM TIMEOUT message 318 3270 Params 187 3270 Params menu Active Char Set 189 Change Case 191 Compatibility Op 192 Early Print Cmpl 189 Format Control 195 Host Override 195 Intervention Req 191 Max Print Width 195 Prt Partial Line 189 PTX Transparent 190 Set Text Orientn 191 Translation Tbl 189 33 PLATEN OPEN TIMOUT message 318 34 RIBBON STALL TIMOUT message 318 48V PWR FAIL message 318 5225 World Trade 182 5250 Params 196 5250 Params menu Active Char Set 198 Format Control 201 Graphic Chek Cod 200 Graphic Chek Err 199 Host Override 201 Max Print Width 201 Prt Partial Line 198 PTX Transparent 198 Set Text Orientn 200 Translation Tbl 197 8 5V PWR FAIL message 317 A A TO D OVERUN message 318 Absorb After PN 160 Absorb After PY 156 Accented Char PRINTER CONTROL 280 ACCESS NULL PTR message 318 Acknowledge Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 297 Acoustic noise level 349 ACTIVATE LOST message 319 Active Char Set 171 181 3270 Params menu 189 5250 Params menu 198 ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu 125 Active IGP Emulation 77 371 Index Adapter Address 75 ADAPTER ADDRESS menu 109 DHCP 110 Gateway address 109 IP address 109
92. CTIVE IGP EMUL This menu allows you to select the PGL or VGL emulation from the menu if IGP is installed EMULATION This menu allows you to configure the options which are available for the current operating active emulation For example if LinePrinter is the active emulation then the LinePrinter emulation options can be configured using this menu PRINTER CONTROL These options allow you to select parameters common to a general user such as display language and Barcode quality ADVANCED USER These options allow you to select several advanced operating parameters for the printer such as the speed at which paper will advance when slewing DIAGNOSTICS These options include the diagnostic tests system memory and statistics of the printer QUICK SETUP QUICK SETUP 6 If LP is selected 7 If ANSI is installed 8 If LG is installed 9 If PCL II is installed 10 If PGL is selected Factory Default 1 If installed 2 If Enet is selected 3 If Wireless is selected 4 If VGL is enabled 5 If VGL is selected QUICK SETUP from page 70 Host Device ID Adapter Ethernet Interface Address 1 Address 1 Auto Switching IPDS IP Address 2 IP Address 2 Centronics 5225 Subnet Mask 2 Subnet Mask 2 Dataproducts 4234 2 Gateway Address 2 Gateway Address 7 Se
93. Compatibility mode idle phase nData Available nPeripheral Request Driven by the printer Indicates the printer has encountered an error Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble mode 1284 Active nAStrobe Driven by the host A peripheral device is selected 301 Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Host Logic High Driven by the host When set to high the host indicates all of its signals are in a valid state When set to low the host indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state ninit Resets init interface from the host Terminating Resistor Configurations The factory equips the printer with several resistors that are used for parallel interface configurations and are suitable for most applications These 470 ohm pull up and 1K ohm pull down terminating resistors are located at RP1 and RP2 shown in Figure 24 If the values of these terminating resistors are not compatible with the particular interface driver requirements of your host computer you may need to install resistors with different pull up and pull down values
94. DING NEGLIGENCE CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL RED HAT PRINTRONIX ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE OR ANY PART THEREOF OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THAT EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 6 U S Government Users The Embedded Software is a commercial item as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Oct 1995 consisting of commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 Sept 1995 Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 and 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 June 1995 all U S Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein 7 Miscellaneous This Agreement represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof If any p
95. E requires more flash service representative FLASH memory to run the downloaded program ERROR PROGRAM Yes The printer is not Use the correct emulation NOT COMPATIBLE compatible withthe software options s for downloaded this printer model program ERROR PROGRAM Yes The printer does There is no program in NOT VALID not see a program printer memory in flash memory Download the emulation ERROR SECURITY No The security key is Contact your authorized KEY NOT not present or service representative DETECTED failed ERROR SHORT AT No Hardware failure in Contact your authorized ADDRESS XXXX SDRAM or service representative controller circuitry 328 Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table P Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution ERROR WRITING No Hardware or Contact your authorized TO FLASH software fault in service representative flash memory ERROR WRONG No The printer Contact your authorized CHECKSUM received the service representative complete program but the checksum did not match ERROR WRONG No The SPX inserted Contact your authorized OEM OR PRINTER in the debug port is service representative TYPE not intended for this model printer or this OEM ETHERNET N A Status message No action is required ADAPTER BEING indicating that the INITIALIZED Network Interface Card is processing the boot procedur
96. Emulation IGP PGL Emulation The PGL emulation is the software based Intelligent Graphics Processor IGP for the line matrix family of printers It is based upon and is compatible with the IGP 100 200 400 board using the PGL The IGP graphics processing features are detailed below Features On Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with a preprinted look for each application IGP programs control all graphic functions dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time Graphic capabilities include boxes vertical and horizontal lines with user selectable thickness logos and special alphanumeric print features Forms and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned fixed information entered when the form is created be overlayed onto the form positioned in a specific location after the form is created or can be dynamically merged with the form Selectable Barcodes provide you with the appropriate barcode for your application using standard wide to narrow ratios A wide selection of barcodes is available Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 UPC A UPC E MSI A through D Code 128 Subset A B and C EAN UCC 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 POSTNET PostBar Royal Mail and PDF417 UPC and EAN barcodes can specify add on data Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where needed Alphanumeric height
97. Emulation 267 M MAC address Adapter Address menu 109 Ethernet Address menu 114 WLAN Address menu 118 Main menu 70 MAINT MISC menu Hex Dump Mode 282 Power Up State 283 PTX Setup Option 282 Maintenance 17 Manual conventions 18 related documents 19 special information 18 warnings 18 Margins 78 Max Line Width 80 Max Line Width PCL II Emulation 265 Max PI 16 164 Max Print Width 179 186 3270 Params menu 195 5250 Params menu 201 Menu ACTIVE IGP EMUL 125 ADVANCED USER 281 CONFIG CONTROL 82 DIAGNOSTICS 289 EMULATION 166 HOST INTERFACE 85 IGP PGL Font Set 145 Main 70 navigating 56 NETWORK SETUP 108 PRINTER CONTROL 276 Midline PY includes PN 157 MSI Check Digit 158 N Name Configs 84 Navigating the menus 56 Nest Serv Type Adapter Params menu 111 NetBIOS protocol Adapter Params menu 111 NetBIOS protocol Ethernet Parameters menu 115 NetBIOS protocol WLAN Parameters menu 119 NETWORK SETUP menu 108 ADAPTER ADDRESS 109 ETHERNET ADDRESS 113 ETHERNET PARAMS 115 WLAN ADDRESS 117 WLAN PARAMS 119 NEW SPX DETECTED message 334 Index Nibble Mode IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 298 NL At MPP 1 175 192 205 noise level acoustic 349 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED message 334 Novell frame Adapter Params menu 111 Novell protocol Adapter Params menu 111 Novell Protocols 110 Null Suppression 176 193 O Offline Process IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Su
98. FCC 154 VIEW EJECT key 29 Voltage 350 VPA Check IPDS Emulation 262 WwW WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER message 343 Warnings 18 Weight printer 348 Width Limit 159 WLAN Address 76 WLAN ADDRESS menu 117 DHCP 118 Gateway address 118 IP address 117 MAC address 118 Subnet mask 118 WLAN Kerberos menu Clock Skew 122 KDC Port Number 122 Kerberos Enable 121 Kerberos Password 122 Renew Lifetime 123 Reset Kerberos Password 122 Ticket Lifetime 122 WLAN LEAP menu Auth Method 123 LEAP Password 124 LEAP Username 124 Reset LEAP Password 124 Reset LEAP User 124 WLAN PARAMETERS menu ASCII data port 120 IPDS Data Port 120 Keep alive timer 120 NetBIOS protocol 119 WLAN PARAMS menu 119 Word Length Serial submenu 102 Index 399 Index 400 For technical assistance contact your Distributor VAR Reseller for service For further assistance contact the Printronix Customer Support Center Printronix Customer Support Center Americas 714 368 2686 Europe Middle East and Africa 31 24 6489 410 Asia Pacific 65 65484114 Web site http www printronix com public servicessupport default aspx Printronix Supplier Center Americas 800 733 1900 Europe Middle East and Africa 33 1 46 25 1900 Asia Pacific 65 65484116 or 65 65484182 Web site http www printronix com public supplies default aspx Printronix Inc Printronix Schweiz Gmbh Printronix Inc 14600 Myford Road 42 Changi Sou
99. ID Yes The printer Download the program NOT PROGRAM encountered an again If the message error trying to displays again contact program flash your authorized service memory representative ERROR FLASH No The printer could Contact your authorized NOT DETECTED not find flash service representative memory ERROR LOCKED No nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn_ Contact your authorized SN nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnn is the service representative nnnnnnnn serial number of the printer s security key The SPX serial number does not match the printer s serial number and cannot be used with the printer ERROR NO DRAM No The printer could Contact your authorized DETECTED not find any service representative DRAM ERROR NVRAM No The non volatile Contact your authorized FAILURE SRAM on the service representative controller board has failed 327 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution ERROR No An interim Contact your authorized OCCURRED message that service representative FLUSHING displays while the QUEUES printer discards host data it cannot use because a fault condition exists ERROR PROGRAM No The printer Contact your authorized NEEDS MORE requires more service representative DRAM DRAM to run the downloaded program ERROR PROGRAM No The printer Contact your authorized NEEDS MOR
100. LG 247 PCL II 246 Epson FX Emulation 241 20 CPI Condensed 243 Alt Set 80 9F 243 Auto LF 242 Character Set 243 Define CR Code 241 Define LF Code 242 Printer Select 242 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID message 326 ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX message 326 ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID message 326 ERROR EC STOPPED AT XXXX message 326 ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM message 327 ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED message 327 Error Handling 161 Barcode Errors 161 Error Markers 161 Error Msgs 161 Offpage Errors 161 ERROR LOCKED SN nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn message 327 Error Markers 161 Index Error Msgs 161 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED message 327 ERROR NVRAM FAILURE message 327 ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES message 328 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM message 328 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH message 328 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE message 328 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID message 328 Error Report 144 ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED message 328 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX message 328 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH message 329 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM message 329 ERROR WRONG OEM OR PRINTER TYPE message 329 ESC c Sequence ANSI Emulation menu 254 ESC d command Serial Matrix Emulation 234 ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED message 329 Ethernet Address 76 379 Index ETHERNET ADDRESS menu 113 DHCP 114 Gateway address 114 IP address 113 MAC address 114 Subnet mask 114 ETHERNET
101. MODE message 337 Power Saver Time ADVANCED USER 287 Power Stacker ADVANCED USER menu 284 POWER SUPPLY HOT message 337 Power Up F 154 Power Up X 154 Power Up PY 154 Powering on the printer 27 Power on S Mode 143 Power Up Config 81 Power Up Config 83 Power Up State MAINT MISC menu 283 PREV NEXT key 32 PREV or NEXT key 32 Primary Char Set PCL II Emulation 265 Prime Signal Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines submenu 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 89 391 Index Prime Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 297 Print Char Set 217 Print Config 83 Print IPDS Fonts IPDS Emulation 262 Print job cancel 52 Print Mode Opt LG Emulation 274 Print Quality 143 157 optimizing 68 Print speed optimizing 69 Print Statistics DIAGNOSTICS 292 Printer component locations 26 control panel 28 dimensions 23 348 exterior cleaning 311 features 13 interior cleaning 312 maintenance 17 models 13 operating modes 27 powering on 27 site requirements 22 weight 348 PRINTER CONTROL menu 276 Accented Char 280 Bar Code Quality 279 Display Language 280 Eject Function 277 Ink Saver Mode 289 Open Platen BOF Bottom of Form 278 392 Ribbon Action 288 Ribbon End Point 277 Tear Bar Dist Distance 279 Unidirectional 279 PRINTER HOT message 337 Printer interfaces 293 Printer PI 163 Printer PI Line 142 Printer Proto
102. MVG sicherzustellen sind die Ger te wie in den Printronix Handb chern angegeben zu installieren und zu betreiben China Declaration This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may need to perform practical actions E g HAAR R CSET MELDMSCPRERATN eH TEA PT FREMONT HER 363 Appendix C Communication Statements Taiwan Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures otf FAN HE oe gt A age ay Sg oe Pe A AR gt FT AL Xe RIT BA TBE gt FES eh HTF eA SRE RGR FE wb a SF AYA Ro ae ol AAS AAWAStSss HE DAIOCU AQHA OSAE OAS FASHA dte Grer TLA Ee HUE Peet ZA HA8 w b amp u Ct CAUTION This product is equipped with a 3 wire power cord and plug for the user s safety Use this power cord in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock Lithium Battery Warning The controller board contains a lithium battery sealed inside the real time clock chip Do not disassemble the chip to replace the battery Do not dispose of the chip by incineration Failure to comply may cause the battery to explode Contact your local waste agency for the correct disposal procedure eS es Bk Gs 365 Appendix C Software License Agreement Software License Agreement 366
103. NLINE 21 GROUND 39 Return 4 Return 5 DATA LINE 3 1 DEMAND DATA REQ 23 Return 2 Return 7 DATA LINE 4 41 PARITY ERROR 27 Return 40 11 DATA LINE 5 34 Return 18 DATA LINE 6 43 Return 42 DATA LINE 7 36 Return 35 DATA LINE 8 28 Return 44 DATA STROBE 38 Return 37 PAPER INSTRUCTION 30 Return 14 BUFFER CLEAR 31 Return 15 NOTE Pins not listed are not connected The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 40 feet 12 meters 294 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals Data Lines 1 through 8 Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the host that specify character data plot data or a control code Data Line 8 allows access to the extended ASCII character set You can enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Dataproducts submenu see page 94 Data Strobe Carries a high true pulse from the host when data is ready The data strobe remains high until the Data Request line goes false The active edge of the strobe signal can be configured as leading middle default or trailing Paper Instruction PI Carries a DVFU signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data lines Ready Carries a high true signal from the printer when AC power and DC voltages are present paper is loaded properly and the printer is not in a check condition Online Carries a high true signal from the pr
104. NT MISC menu 282 PTX Transparent 173 183 3270 Params menu 190 5250 Params menu 198 Alt Set 80 9F 174 183 Lead in Chars 173 183 Usr Defined HTRN 174 183 PUM Default ANSI Emulation menu 256 Pwr Save Control ADVANCED USER 287 PWRSUPP VOLT message 338 Q QUEUE OVERRUN message 338 QUICK SETUP menu Active IGP Emulation 77 Adapter Address 75 Device ID 75 Ethernet Address 76 Form Length 77 79 Form Width 77 79 393 Index Horiz Forms 80 Host Interface 75 Margins 78 Max Line Width 80 Page Length Rep 80 PGL SFCC 77 Power Up Config 81 Printer Protocol 77 P Series SFCC 78 Ribbon End Point 80 Save Config 81 Select CPI 78 Select LPI 78 Vert Forms 79 WLAN Address 76 R RBN AT END POINT message 339 RBN SENSOR ERROR message 338 Ready Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 295 Receive Data RD RS 232 305 Received CR ANSI Emulation menu 255 Received DEL ANSI Emulation menu 255 Reload paper 34 REMOVE USED SPX message 338 Renew Lifetime WLAN Kerberos menu 123 Report Status Auto Switching submenu 88 Request to Send RS 232 305 Serial submenu 103 394 Requirements power 21 printer site 22 Reset Cfg Names 84 Reset Cmd CFG Ld 218 ANSI Emulation menu 254 Reset Cmd CFG Ld PCL II Emulation 268 Reset Kerberos Password WLAN Kerberos menu 122 Reset LEAP Password WLAN LEAP menu 124 Reset LEAP User WLAN LEAP menu 124 Resistor configurations
105. OFFLINE QUICK SETUP 4 OFFLINE PRINTER CONTROL UNTIL 5 PRINTER CONTROL lt Y Ribbon End Point 6 PRINTER CONTROL Barcode Quality UNTIL 7 Barcode Quality Changing Parameters Example Step Press LCD Notes 8 Barcode Quality Cycle through the Draft choices OR 9 ENTER Barcode Quality The indicates this choice O Draft is active 10 PRINTER CONTROL lt gt Barcode Quality 11 PRINTER CONTROL Display Language UNTIL 12 Display Language L gt English 13 Display Language Press until the desired Spanish parameter displays OR 14 ENTER Display Language The indicates this choice Spanish is active 15 ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key 2890 LOCKED 59 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press LCD Notes 16 ON LINE CLEAR ENTER Save Press ENTER to ONLINE No Save automatically save CD configuration changes Press ONLINE to continue without saving 17A ENTER Cfg 1 Configuration changes Power Up Cfg have been saved as Configuration 1 and will be set as the Power Up config The printer will then be brought online Q 17B ON LINE CLEAR ONLINE Places the printer online Ribbon Life 100 without permanently CD saving the configuration changes 18 The printer is ready for operation Auto Save Configuration After any changes are made to the Factory Default configuration menu items you will be prompted to save the c
106. PRINTRONIX P7000 User s Manual READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER Software License Agreement CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER USING THIS PRINTER INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE AND WRITTEN MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED THEM AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED Definitions Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable data and program The term Software Product includes the Software resident in the printer and its documentation The Software Product is licensed not sold to you and Printronix Inc either owns or licenses from other vendors who own all copyright trade secret patent and other proprietary rights in the Software Product License 1 Authorized Use You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software resident in the printer solely for your own customary business or personal purposes 2 Restrictions a To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix Inc you agree to maintain the Software Product and other proprietary information concerning the typefaces in strict confidence b You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software Product Cc You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer all or any portion of the Software Product separate
107. Params Factory Default 1 Option needs to CTHI be selected from page 167 Simp Prot Conv SPC Coax Params Logical Buf Image Buf Intervention Buffer Print Translation Column 132 Usr Defined Size Size Req Tbl Wrap HTRN 1920 4K Send to Host Disable Disable Start Code 1 960 2K Do Not Send Enable Enable Start Code 2 2560 Stop Code 3440 3564 PA1 PA2 Buffer SPC SPC NL At Reprint Null Supp Space Supp MPP 1 Disable Disable On Enable Enable Off Logical Buf Size Refers to the size of the printer buffer which should be set the same as the host screen buffer size If the host screen size is unknown use 1920 Do not change this parameter in the middle of a print job Image Buf Size This option refers to the printer base buffer size This size must be set to a value greater than or equal to the Logical Buffer Size 202 SPC Coax Params Intervention Req Send to Host default The printer sends a signal to the host computer when the CANCEL key is pressed or a printer fault or hold mode time out occurs e Do Not Send No signal will be sent to the host computer Buffer Print e Disable default The printer will print normally e Enable The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values Refer to page 315 for
108. Power Save Energy Star mode e Disable Allows you to disable the Power Save Energy Star mode Cancel Key e Disable default e Enable The CANCEL key may be used to clear all data in the print buffer without printing any of the data 287 288 Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Set Lock Key Normally to lock or unlock the printer menu the UP and DOWN keys are pressed at the same time The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu You may choose almost any group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys You cannot use the ENTER key or any key combinations which are already used for another function There is no limit to how many keys you can select To set the new lock key follow these steps 1 Work your way through the configuration menu until the display reads Set Lock Key follow the menu structure on page 281 Press ENTER The display reads Select a new lock key Press the combination of keys you want to be the new lock key Make sure you press all keys selected at the same time If the selection is valid the display will read Enter the new lock key again If the selection is invalid the display will read Invalid key selection Return to step 2 and start over Press the same combination of keys a second time If the new lock key combination is entered again correctly the display will read Lock key has been changed If it was entered
109. Processing A general purpose font printing out at 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically The width of the font will vary with each cpi NLQ A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi vertically This font has serifs and the width of the font varies with the cpi OCR A OCR B Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 144 dpi vertically Both fonts print only at 10 cpi High Speed A draft quality font printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi vertically The width of the font varies with the cpi NLQ Sans Serif A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi vertically This font prints without serifs The width of the font varies with the cpi High Speed 100 A draft quality font printing at 100 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 10 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change NLQ 200 This NLQ font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 96 vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 12 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change DP 200 This Data Processing font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 12 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change LinePrinter Plus Emulation High Speed 64 This font prints at 120 dpi horizontally and 64 vertically When chosen from the
110. Quality 0 cece neern 68 Optimizing Print Speed 0 ceceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeees 69 Main Menu arie a A A RER 70 QUICK SE TUP ini eien a Alin ni eee 73 CONFIG CONTROL wriicee eects s araea tn ekige aan iia 82 HOST INTERFACE rii erne aa akaa eias 85 Auto Switching SUbMenU sssesseesseeeseesrrresrrerrrsernes 86 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 88 Centronics Parallel Submenu 91 Dataproducts Standard Submenu ccsceeeeeees 94 Serial SUBMENU eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeteeeeteeeees 98 E Net Adapter SUDMENU eeeeeeeeeeteeeteeteeteteeees 106 Ethernet SUBMENU ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeaeeeteeeeee 107 NETWORK SETUP MENU c ccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaees 108 ADAPTER ADDRESS sictir ein aeeiiaii 109 ADAPTER PARAMG cceeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeteneeeeeaes 110 ETHERNET ADDRESS 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 113 ETHERNET PARAMG 2 cccceeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 115 WLAN ADDRESS 0 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneaes 117 WLAN PARAMS siisii iii 119 Table of Contents WLAN KERBEROG ccccccccesesceceesesneeeeessneeeeessaes 121 WLAN LEAP oinaan ccs ad e tenn died ive i 123 ACTIVE IGP EMUL iile oe e naa 125 IGP PGL Emulation cccccccsscsccececceeeeeeessssssseeeseeeeens 126 Features ann i onk niente her bai 126 Configuring The Emulation With The Contro
111. R Disable LF CR LF char01 SOH Elng BS Font SO 10 3 LPI CR CR LF_ Enable LF LF char 03 ETX Elng SO Font BS 6 0 LPI char 09 HT HS Print VFU Select Upr Case Slew Select Relative char 02 STX EVFU Disable 1 16 lines char 03 ETX DVFU Enable 1 15 lines char 09 HT CVFU Disable 228 Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 8 or 10 3 LPI P Series XQ Emulation Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Disable default Discards any data past the forms width e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width Define LF Code e LF CR LF default Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command rec
112. R EM and NL control codes either as spaces or as control codes e On default Treats the CR EM and NL commands as control codes e Off Treats the CR EM and NL commands as spaces 177 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 178 Translate Table Defines which translate table to use for printing e Default default Translates data by using the default table of the current character set Downloaded Translates data from EBCDIC to internal code by using the downloaded translate table Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings e Disable default Allows the following host commands to override operator panel settings line length forms length lines per inch LPI characters per inch CPI print quality and text orientation Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option e Enable The operator panel settings override the host commands Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Disable default Reflects distance generated by the IGP VGL feature IGP PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed e Enable Does
113. Remove any but the elevator is obstructions not moving 2 Run the print job again If the message appears again contact your authorized service representative TABLE MISMATCH No Indicates that the Contact your authorized DOWNLOAD AGAIN software update service representative 1 has failed and should be reloaded TCB CORRUPTED No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board TCP PORT BUSY Yes Error message Refer to the Printronix P7000 PSA3 Printers Maintenance Manual 342 Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution UNDEF No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized INTERRUPT error on controller service representative board UNDFNED No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized OPCODE error on controller service representative board UNKNOWN RBN1 Yes Ribbon was not a Install a new ribbon Install New RBN Printronix coded barcode UNKNOWN RBN2 Yes Ribbon not Install a new ribbon Install New RBN authorized UP DRV SHORT No Hammer drive Cycle power to see if the circuits on the message Clears if not boards shorted to contact your authorized ground service representative WAITING FOR N A Appears when the No action is required ETHERNET printer is first ADAPTER powered on if the optional Network Interface Card is installed 1 Be
114. Right to Left When a right to left language is selected the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online Intervention Req Select from the following e Not Send To Host e Send To Host default The printer sends a signal to the host computer when any of the following occur e Printer faults occur Hold mode time out occurs If not selected the printer will only send the signal on printer faults that cause data loss paper jam ribbon stall online platen open etc 191 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 192 Compatibility Op The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the non SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated CR At MPP 1 MPP is Maximum Print Position which is also known as line length This option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP 1 e On default Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line e Off Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line NL At MPP 1 Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line e On default Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position e Off Moves to the first print position of the next print line Position Aft FF 4234 only Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed command is sent e O
115. Text Host Format Chek Err Chek Cod Orientn Override Control Enable 60 Left to Right Disable Disable Disable 40 FE Right to Left Enable Enable __ Max Print NOTE Width 1 This menu appears only if the TN5250 option is installed 13 2 inches Printer Width 196 5250 Params Char Set Select from page 196 5250 Params Factory Default _ Secondary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK 0892 OCRA 0893 OCR B 0424 Hebrew 0803 Hebrew Old 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0256 Intern 1 1112 Balt Mult 0924 Euro Lat 9 1122 Estonian 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro ltal 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro English UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice 0500 Internat 5 Translation Tbl English US Austrian German Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Finnish Swedish French Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Spanish Spanish Speak English UK Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Latin 2 ROECE
116. a fixed default configuration and allows you to define several custom configurations for use with particular print jobs The factory default configuration can be loaded but it cannot be altered Eight configurations can be modified for unique print job requirements The Save Config option allows you to save eight groups of parameter settings in memory as custom configurations numbered from 1 through 8 An explanation on how to save a set of parameter values as a custom configuration using the Save Config menu option begins on page 61 55 56 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Navigating The Menus To manipulate configurations review the following instructions about navigating through the menus You must be offline to move within the menus ON LINE CLEAR OR OR e ENTER e90 Press to toggle between ONLINE and OFFLINE Menus are accessed with the printer offline Press to move up or down through the menu levels Press to scroll through the available choices on a chosen level Press to confirm selection Press to lock and unlock the ENTER key The ENTER key is locked by default to prevent you from accidentally changing the printer configuration The lock and unlock function can be configured to be other than 4 Y See Set Lock Key on page 288 To experiment with navigating the menus use the example on the next page as a tutorial OFFLINE QUICK SETUP Changing Paramet
117. able CR LF CR FF Single Disable Disable Big 1 2 5 Guard Bars Enable Disable 269 Chapter 4 LG Emulation 270 Corespon 12 8 Corespon 15 6 Corespon 15 8 Corespon 15 10 OCRA Font from previous page Style Character Set DP 10 6 GL Char Set DP 108 U S ASCII DP 126 DEC Finnish DP 128 French DP 156 DEC Fr Can DP 158 German DP 15 10 Italian HS 106 JIS Roman Corespon 5 6 DEC Nor Dan Corespon 5 8 Spanish Corespon 6 6 DEC Swedish Corespon 6 8 DEC Great Brit Corespon 106 ISO Nor Dan Corespon 108 DEC Dutch Corespon 12 6 DEC Swiss DEC Portuguese VT100 Graphics DEC Suppl DEC Technical ISO Katakana OCR B 7 Bit Hebrew Compress 6 6 7 Bit Turkish Compress 6 8 Greek Suppl Compress 8 6 Compress 8 8 Compress 13 6 Compress 13 8 Compress 13 10 Compress 16 6 Compress 16 8 Hebrew Suppl Turkish Suppl GR Char Set DEC Suppl DEC Technical VT100 Graphics ISO Katakana Compress 16 10 ISO Latin 1 DP 56 ISO Latin 2 DP 58 ISO Latin 9 DP 66 ISO Cyrillic DP 68 ISO Greek ISO Hebrew Hebrew Suppl Turkish LG Emulation Font Select a default font style and character set for the LG emulation as follows Style This option allows you to specify a print quality that includes a characters per inch cpi and lines per inch lpi setting in the format Type cpi Ipi The default setting is DP 10 6 Data Processing 10 cpi 6 Ipi The print quality types you may choose from are as follows
118. acter in the print order the form feed function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option e Off default Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next form FF After Job Determines the print position after an operator initiated local copy print screen function e Off default Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print buffer unless a new line form feed or carriage return command was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the first line on the next form CR EM and NL 3287 only CR Carriage Return EM Error Message and NL New Line specify that the printer treat the CR EM and NL control codes either as spaces or as control codes e On default Treats the CR EM and NL commands as control codes e Off Treats the CR EM and NL commands as spaces 3270 Params Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings e Disable default Allows these host commands to override operator panel settings line length forms length lines per inch LPI characters per inch CPI print quality and text or
119. age 315 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout LinePrinter Plus Emulation LinePrinter Plus Emulation NOTE When the printer is set to SPC Twx Params or SPC Coax Params no LP menu items will take effect on the same offline The LP Emulation resets when the printer is taken offline Factory Default EMULATION from page 166 LinePrinter Printer CPI LPI Host Font Page Print Char Protocol Select Command Attributes Format Set see next page Select LPI Enable see next page see page 211 6 0 LPI Ignore All 8 0 LPI Ignore CPI 10 3 LPI Ignore LPI P S Mode CPI Ignore Unidir Changed Unchanged Select CPI 10 0 CPI 12 0 CPI 13 3 CPI 15 0 CPI 17 1 CPI 20 0 CPI Reset Cmd Set Barcode CFG Ld Substitution x offset Disable Inactive Disable Power up config Active Enable Current config Factory config 209 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation Printer Protocol from page 209 P Series XQ P Series Serial Matrix see page 232 see page 219 see page 228 Font Attributes from page 209 Proprinter Factory Default XL see page 236 Epson FX see page 241 Typeface Prop Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Text Spacing Zero Position Data Pr
120. age Correct Explanation Solution ONLINE Yes Enable poll Check cable connection CU TIMED OUT timeout The and host system printer was not enabled for one minute Coax interface PAP BAD TABLE No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board PAP BSY TOO LNG No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board PAP FIFO OVERFL No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board PAP FIFO UNDRFL No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board PAP ILLGL ST No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board PAP INCMPL ENER No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board PAP INVLD CMD No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board PAP INVLD PARM No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller board service representative 335 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User error on controller board Platen Invalid State Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PAP NOT SCHED No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative
121. also containing 96 characters in length These are also stored in memory 127 Chapter 4 IGP PGL Emulation IMPORTANT 128 Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel You can select PGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by control codes as explained in the IGP PGL Programmer s Reference Manual The PGL parameters are described on the following pages Parameters marked with an asterisk indicate the default value The printer must be offline to enter the configuration structure Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely Configure the IGP PGL according to your specific requirements BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP PGL print a configuration sheet to see all of the current settings IGP PGL Submenu IGP PGL Submenu Factory Default EMULATION from page 70 IGP PGL Define CR Define LF Autowrap PGL PI Slew CR Edit Code Code SFCC Range CR CR LF LF Disable 126 16 Disable CR CR LF LF CR LF _ Enable 1 255 15 Enable Select SlashO SelectLPI Auto SkipCmd __ Forms Font Uppercase Prefix Handling see page 145 Disable 6 0 Disable Enab
122. ammer coil count test failed Do not power off the printer until downloading is complete Contact your authorized service representative 325 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Controller has stopped and is in the state identified by the number displayed Displayed Message Cae Explanation Solution E NET TEST Yes The Ethernet Cycle power Wait for E UNAVAILABLE PCBA did not Net Ready to display initialize correctly then retry operation If the fault message appears again contact your authorized service representative ERROR DC Yes The printer cannot Download the program PROGRAM NOT find the data again If the message VALID controller program appears replace the flash or the validation memory SIMM checksum is corrupt ERROR DRAM AT No The printer founda Contact your authorized ADDRESS defective memory service representative XXXXXXXX location ERROR EC No The printer cannot Contact your authorized PROGRAM NOT find the engine service representative VALID controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt ERROR EC No XXXX is anumber Contact your authorized STOPPED AT from 0000 to 0010 service representative STATE XXXX The Engine 326 Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution ERROR FLASHD
123. ammer s Reference Manual Provides information used with the optional Code V emulation enhancement feature e ANSI Programmer s Reference Manual Provides host control codes and character sets for the ANSI emulation e IPDS Twinax Emulation Programmer s Reference Manual Provides an overview of Intelligent Printer Data Stream IPDS features commands and diagnostics e Character Sets Reference Manual Information about and examples of the character sets available in line matrix printers e Network Interface Card User s Manual Information about network protocols configuration and operation 19 Chapter 1 Printronix Customer Support Center Printronix Customer Support Center 20 The Printronix Customer Support Center offers technical support with Installation Configuration and setup Operation and supplies loading Specifications of the proper print media and ribbon Answers to post sale service support questions Call the Printronix Customer Support Center at 1 714 368 2686 in the Americas 31 24 6489489 in Europe Middle East and Africa 65 65484114 in Asia Pacific or visit the Printronix web page at www printronix com http www printronix com public servicesupport default aspx 2 Setting Up The Printer Before You Begin Read this chapter carefully before installing and operating the printer The printer is easy to install However for your safety and to protect valuable equipme
124. and width are controlled independently for a wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size up to 11 3 inches wide and tall Compressed print sizes of 10 12 13 15 17 and 20 characters per inch cpi are available Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and shading features for a customized appearance to forms reports and labels 126 IGP PGL EMULATION Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design Normal expanded and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise or they can be printed upside down Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background Automatic Increment Decrement Capability allows batch form processing Individual alphabetic numeric and barcode data fields can be identified and automatically incremented or decremented by any amount beginning from a specified reference point Scaling Capability permits graphic elements such as corners or boxes to retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi Multinational Character Sets provide many international character sets each 96 characters in length This feature also allows you to create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in memory Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets
125. and zeros become ones Resp Polarity The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of your host computer e Standard default Does not invert the response signal e Inverted Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer Latch Data On Specifies whether the data is read on the leading middle or trailing edge of the data strobe signal The default is Middle 95 96 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Prime Signal e Disable default The parallel port will not perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal e Enable The parallel port will perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal TOF Action e Reset default A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled e Do Nothing Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host Buffer Size in K Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Dataproducts parallel port buffer You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments Auto Trickle Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer s buffers are almost full the printer will begin to trickle data in at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu until the buffers sta
126. are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of print and shading features which provides a customized appearance for forms reports and labels The registered trademark copyright TUV GS Mark UL and CSA symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL and you can also define custom symbols Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray shaded background Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs Automatic Increment Decrement Capability allows batch form processing Individual alphabetic numeric and barcode data fields can be identified and automatically incremented or decremented by any amount beginning from a specified reference point Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets Based on the Multinational Character Set you can create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel You can select VGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by control codes as explained in the IGP VGL Programmer s Reference Manual The VGL parameters are described on the following pages Parameters marked with an asterisk indicate the default value The printer must be offline to enter the configura
127. at fast speed e Shuttle Only Exercises only the shuttle at fast speed e Phase Printer Checks for wavy print The initial phase value is set in the factory Run the test and check the quality The phase value prints on the left margin If the print looks too wavy change the Phase Value parameter while the test is running While the phase printer test runs press the DOWN key To change the value press the PREV or NEXT key until the desired value displays and then press ENTER CAUTION DIAGNOSTICS e Paperout Adj Verifies the current Paper Out Dots setting which determines where the last line of text will print when there is a paper out condition Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen e Burnin Test Reserved for factory use e Print Error Log Prints the current log of errors Most non routine faults ribbon stall voltage faults are stored in the error log e Print Ribbon Log Prints log of ribbons that have been used in the printer e Clear Error Log Clears entries in the error log e Adapter Test Prints the Ethernet adapter statistics stored on the Ethernet adapter if present e Ethernet Test Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet if present e Acoustics A particular test pattern that is used to measure acoustics Demo Demonstration of various print attributes e Dice Five Pattern used to measure print density Paper Out Dots Only authorized servi
128. ate page Factory Default UPC Descenders Optimized _ 1 2 5 Al 00 SelectSO User Def Ratio Selection Spaces Char Ratio Always Never Only with PDF 136 Disable Leading Zero _Disable 14 Enable Enable Trailing Space Enable 0 255 Disable X2 DPD Modulo 7 CD IGP PGL Submenu Barcode Options The following sub options help define specific options regarding barcode printing UPC Descenders This parameter allows you to print barcode descenders when human readable data is not present in the UPC EAN barcodes e Always default UPC EAN barcodes are printed with descenders even if there is no human readable data e Never UPC EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data e Only with PDF UPC EAN barcodes are printed with descenders only when the PDF command is present Optimized Ratio This option selects different barcode ratios for certain barcodes including Code 39 and I 2 5 It is included for compatibility with the IGP X00 printers Disable default Use standard barcode ratios e Enable Select the alternate barcode ratios 137 Chapter 4 IGP PGL Emulation l 2 5 Selection This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP X00 customization Usually if 2 5 barcodes have an odd number of digits a leading zero is inserted in front of the data However this special IGP X00 customization gives you the option of ad
129. ation setting Truncate PI Slew e Truncate at TOF default The slew is terminated when the next Top of Form is reached This function applies to the ANSI EVFU only e Disable PI slews will be completed independent of their length ETX ACK End of Text Acknowledge The host controls the flow of communcation to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text ETX signal When the printer receives the ETX signal it acknowledges the ETX thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data e Disable default Immediate Afterprint IPDS Emulation IPDS Emulation Factory Default EMULATION from page 166 IPDS Font Size Print Quality Graphics Barcode Barcode Quality Quality Speed Select By Host Select By Host High High High Standard Default Font Select By Host Select By Host Select By Host Compressed Low Low Low char 01 SOH char 03 ETX char 09 HT Barcode Early Print Graphics Graphic 12 5 Size Comp Scaling Charsize Checksum 4234 Off Rounded 4234 Standard 1 3 67XX On Exact 67XX Special 4 9 64XX 4224 Default Code Code Page Pag Subset M Internat Set 5 Portuguese Farsi Thai English USA Can Spanish Yugoslavian Version 0 Austrian German Spanish Speak Latin 9 Version 1 Belgian Old English UK Euro US CAN Ve
130. authorized service representative ILL EXT BUS ACC No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board ILLGL OPR ACCSS No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized error on controller service representative board INCOMPAT E NET Yes Incompatible Install a compatible NIC network interface to the printer then reboot card NIC is If this message still installed appears contact your authorized service representative INTAKE FAN FAULT Yes Sensors cannot See description for HMR BANK FAN FLT Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution INTERRUPT No The controller Cycle power If this UNUSED VECTOR board receives an message occurred once 00 interrupt it does not and never again you can understand ignore it If the message reappears or appears consistently contact your authorized service representative INVALID ACTIVATE No Printer detects The printer reports the twinax protocol error communication errors INVALID COMMAND No Printer detects The printer reports the twinax protocol error host action is communication required errors LO DRV SHORT No Circuit s on the Contact your authorized hammer bank or in service representative the hammer bank power cable shorted to ground LOAD PAPER Yes Printer is out of Load paper paper LOADING No Status messag
131. authorized service representative Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table F Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution 06 HOST REQUEST Yes Host attention The host computer or message printer controller requires attention 08 HOLD PRINT Yes Printer was offline Press ON LINE to put TIMEOUT more than 10 printer in online state minutes and the Intervention Required parameter is set to Send to Host 8 5V PWR FAIL No Internal power Contact your authorized failure service representative 15 COMM CHECK Yes Line not active Check cable connection twinax interface 15V CTL FAIL No Controller voltage Contact your authorized failure service representative 22 INVALID ADDR Yes Unit address not Ensure that printer recognized by address matches host printer Twinax setting interface 23 5V CTL FAIL No Controller voltage Contact your authorized failure service representative 31 PAPER OUT Yes Atimeout message Load paper TIMEOUT is sent to the host if paper is not loaded 10 minutes after CLEAR was pressed to clear the paper out fault 317 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct Explanation Solution 32 PAPER JAM TIMEOUT Yes A timeout message is sent to the host if no paper motion has occurred for 10 minutes after CLEAR was p
132. b After APY Absorb Motion Absorb All Disable Expanded Font Enable Adjusted Disable Disable Data Processing Scalable Disable Not Adjusted Enable Enable High Block LP Font MSI Check 125 Al 00 Width Limit Absorb After Digit Selection Spaces APN Disable Print 125 Odd Data Disable Disable Disable Enable Don t Print Leading Zero Enable Enable Enable Check Digit Convert Alpha Disable Enable IGP110 Auto FF Ignore Lxx Compatbl at PN Cmd Disable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Chapter 4 EMULATION from page 70 IGP VGL IGP VGL Submenu with PCL II IGP VGL Emulation Factory Default Graphics Error Ignore DB8 Options Handling Setup Control Char 6 see next page Error Msgs Ignore Nulls 5E 7 Enable Disable Ignore Mode 8 Disable Enable Disable 9 Error Markers Data Bit 8 Enable 10 Enable Enable Free Format Disable Disable Disable Offpage Errors Enable Disable Mgnum Conversion Enable Disable Barcode Errors Enable Enable Disable ISO PI Control Char Set 0 Printer Pl 1 33 Disable Enable Host PI Disable Enable Max PI 16 Enable Disable 150 IGP VGL Submenu with PCL II Graphics Factory Default Options from page 150 S
133. bmenu 90 Offpage Errors 161 OLD RIBBON message 334 ON LINE key 29 ON LINE message 334 One Char Enquiry Serial submenu 105 Online Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 297 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 295 ONLINE 28 CU NOT ENAB message 334 ONLINE 8344 FAILED message 334 ONLINE CU TIMED OUT message 335 Open Platen BOF Bottom of Form PRINTER CONTROL 278 Operating modes 27 389 Index Operational procedures cancel a print job 52 reload paper 34 unload paper 45 Optimized Ratio 137 Optimizing print quality 68 Optimizing print speed 69 Output Darkness 15 Overstrike 222 Serial Matrix Emulation 233 Overview printer models 13 P PA1 171 204 PA2 172 204 Page Format 217 ANSI Emulation menu 251 Page L Inches PCL II Emulation 268 Page L Lines PCL II Emulation 267 Page Length Rep 80 Page Length Rep PCL II Emulation 265 PAP BAD TABLE message 335 PAP BSY TOO LNG message 335 PAP FIFO OVERFL message 335 PAP FIFO UNDRFL message 335 PAP ILLGL ST message 335 PAP INCMPL ENER message 335 PAP INVLD CMD message 335 PAP INVLD PARM message 335 PAP NOT SCHED message 336 PAP NT AT SPEED message 336 PAP UNEXP INT message 336 390 Paper reload 34 unload 45 PAPER ADVANCE key 29 Paper Empty PE Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 297 Paper Instruction Pl Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 297 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 29
134. bon Around the Ribbon Guide 6 Thread the ribbon around the ribbon guide and along the ribbon path Be sure to thread the ribbon between the hammer bank cover and the ribbon mask 7 Place the empty spool on the left hub Press the spool down until it snaps into place 51 Chapter 3 52 Integrated Print Management System 9 Turn the left spool by hand to make sure the ribbon tracks correctly in the ribbon path and around the ribbon guides 10 Close the platen lever 11 Close the printer top cover If you want to increase the darkness level of the ribbon at the end of life go to Ribbon End Point on page 277 and follow the procedures for adjusting the image density If you are satisfied with the print darkness press the ON LINE CLEAR key twice to return the printer to operation Cancel A Print Job The procedure to cancel a print job depends on the printer emulation and your application software Contact your system administrator for additional information 1 If the printer is online press ON LINE CLEAR to place the printer in offline mode 2 From the host system stop the print job NOTE If the print job is not stopped from the host system before pressing CANCEL the print job continues with data missing when the printer returns to online mode Exercise caution to prevent unwanted data loss occurrences as this function deletes unprinted data in the printer This function is active only in offline mod
135. c Austrian German Spanish 0273 Austr Germ 0803 Hebrew Old 0905 Turk Old German Alt Spanish Alt 0274 Belg Old 0424 Hebrew 0256 Intern 1 Belgian Spanish Speak 0275 Brazilian 0892 OCRA 0924 Euro Lat 9 Brazilian Swiss Fren Ger 0260 Canad Fren 0893 OCR B 1140 Euro Eng Canadian French Old Hebrew 0277 Danish 0420 Arabic 1141 Euro Aust Danish Norweg Hebrew 0287 Danish Alt 0880 Cyril Old 1142 Euro Dan Danish Alt Farsi Latin 0278 Finnish 0423 Greek Old 1143 Euro Finn Finnish Swedish Greek Old 0288 Finn Alt 0875 Gr New Euro 1144 Euro Ital Finnish Alt Greek New 0297 French 0871 Icelandic 1145 Euro Span French Arabic 0500 Internat 5 0290 Japan Kata 1146 Euro UK International Turkish 0280 Italian 0870 Latin 2 1147 Euro Fren Italian Turkish Old 0281 Japan Eng 0838 Thai 1148 Euro Swiss Japanese Eng Latin 2 ROECE 0282 Portuguese 1026 Turkish 1149 Euro Ice Japanese Katak Yugoslavian 0284 Span Speak Compatibility Op from page 169 CRAt NL At Position Aft FF Last Char FF Null FF Validity MPP 1 MPP 1 4234 only Suppression On On Off On Off Off Off Off On Off On On Auto Skip FF After Job CR EM amp NL At End 3287 only Off Off On On On Off 170 Coax Emulation Char Set Select Specifies the print language used by the printer Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual Translation Tbl Prints out SCS and DSC DSE tables of the Coax interface s current character set This op
136. cates life remaining of the currently installed ribbon The default settings for this feature should match the requirements for most applications no special user setup is needed If your particular application requires darker printing or can tolerate lighter printing the ribbon end point can be adjusted as appropriate Please refer Ribbon End Point on page 80 33 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Operational Procedures This section contains routine printer operating procedures on how to e reload paper e unload paper e cancel a print job Reload Paper Do this procedure when LOAD PAPER displays This message occurs when the last sheet of paper passes through the paper slot This procedure reloads paper without removing the last sheet of the old paper supply while retaining the current top of form setting P lot Paper Slot avert peat Pe Metal Paper Guide P7220 Only L rydid Cabinet Models Pedestal Models Figure 6 Paper Slot Location 34 Reload Paper Raise the printer cover Raise the platen lever as far as it will go See Figure 4 on page 26 for the location of the lever Press ON LINE CLEAR to turn off the alarm Do not open the tractor doors or remove the existing paper For cabinet models open the front door Align the paper supply with the label on the floor Ensure the paper pulls freely from the box Feed the paper up through
137. ce representatives should set this parameter This parameter is used to adjust the paper out distance from the perforation you can specify where the last line on the page will print when there is a paper out condition Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen System Memory Displays the amount of RAM installed 291 Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 292 Print Statistics You can view various printer statistics and refer to them for preventive maintenance purposes Printer statistics accumulate continuously they do not reset when you turn off the printer All of the printer statistics are set to zero at the factory after burn in testing e On The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on The range is 0 to 30 000 hours e Print The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing The range is 0 to 30 000 hours e Print Strokes The cumulative number of back and forth shuttle strokes the printer has printed during normal printer operation The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647 shuttle strokes e Print Lines The cumulative number of lines the printer has printed The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647 print lines e 11 inch Pages The cumulative number of pages the printer has printed The range in print pages is 0 to 2 147 483 647 total inches of paper movement divided by 11 DRAM Avail The number of volatile DRAM memory bytes available to the application for variable workspace and page
138. ceived DEL e Observe default A DEL code received from the host is handled as a Delete command e Ignore A DEL code received from the host is ignored Private Mode Determines the default type of character set Set 1 or Set 2 This can also be set by ESC sequences ESC gt 5h and ESC gt 5l Refer to these descriptions in the ANS Programmer s Reference Manual for further details Pos on BC OvrSz e Set to top default The paper is fed back to the top of barcodes or oversized characters after they are printed This allows printing on the same line e Set to bottom The printer will continue printing without backing up BC Check Digit e By host default The host calculates the barcode check digit and sends it along with the barcode The check digit is not verified by the printer but printed as it was received By printer The barcode is sent without the check digit and the printer calculates and adds it in 255 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation 256 Barcode Darkmode e Enable default The barcodes are printed at a higher resolution e Disable The barcodes are printed at lower resolution but at a higher speed PUM Default This is the Unit of Measure UOM as it is used within the ANSI emulation Coordinates received in ESC sequences can be sent in two UOMs e Decipoints default A unit of 1 720 inch e Lines or columns Uses the current LPI and CPI values The UOM used is determined by this configur
139. change the active configuration if multiple configurations have been saved or the typeface of the printer ENTER When navigating the configuration menus ENTER selects the currently displayed option value as the active value An asterisk appears next to the active value on the display ENTER is also used for starting and stopping printer tests and generating a configuration printout NOTE The ENTER key must be unlocked in order to function See UP DOWN below The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a key combination other than 4 Y see page 288 UP or DOWN 4 or Y Moves up or down between levels in the configuration menus and makes vertical forms adjustment After pressing VIEW press 4 or v to adjust the paper up or down in 1 72 inch increments for fine vertical forms alignment When the printer is in offline mode press 4 or Y to move through levels in the configuration menus UP DOWN 4 7 Locks and unlocks the ENTER key NOTE The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a key combination other than 4 see page 288 31 Chapter 3 The Control Panel 32 PREV or NEXT 4 or gt Moves between the options on the current level of configuration menu In the configuration menu press 4 to scroll backward or press gt to scroll forward through the menu selections on the same level PREV NEXT 4 gt When both keys are pressed simultaneously the printe
140. character in the barcode Default Code Pag Choose which code page to use with the IPDS emulation This option is independent of the Character Set selection in the CTHI emulation 261 Chapter 4 262 IPDS Emulation Code Page Subset When the Thai code page is selected as the default either from the front panel or by a host command you may choose from three different versions Default Font Choose a font quality and size from the available selections All fonts in the Default Font menu are available in standard and compressed vertical resolution see page 257 VPA Check e Enable default The printer checks for dots that fall outside the intersection of the logical and physical pages If dots fall outside the area the printer reports an error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling Control command setting requires error reporting e Disable The printer does not report dots outside the valid printable area Hexdump Mode A hex code printout or hex dump translates all incoming data to hexadecimal equivalents A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the host computer together with its corresponding two digit hexadecimal code Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception problems Print IPDS Fonts This feature allows you to print a list of all resident fonts currently available in the active IPDS emulation PCL II Emulation PCL II Emulation EMUL
141. ched to one host with a Centronics connection and a second host with an RS 422 serial connection you would select Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu RS 422 under the Serial Hotport menu and Disable under the C T Hotport menu Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport 87 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Timeout This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and check the other selected port types for data to print When the printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time it needs to timeout
142. code Quality Tear Bar Dist Unidirectional Display Language Accented Char 3 ADVANCED USER page 281 Ptx Setup Option 3 Hex Dump Mode Power up State Downloaded Fonts 3 PMD Fault Power Stacker Auto Elevator Auto Locking File System Set Sharing 2 Shuttle Timeout Slow Paper Slew Alarm Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Cancel Key Set Lock Key Ribbon Action Ink Saver Mode Main Menu DIAGNOSTICS page 289 Printer Tests Test Width Paper Out Dots System Memory Print Statistics DRAM Avail Flash Avail lif installed 2 If Ethernet is installed 3 Not available in LG or PCL Il 71 72 Chapter 4 Main Menu Brief descriptions follow for the first level configuration menu options QUICK SETUP These options allow quick access to the most frequently changed or inputted parameters during the installation of the printer CONFIG CONTROL These options allow you to save print load delete name and reset entire sets of configuration parameters HOST INTERFACE These options allow you to select either the Serial RS 232 Serial RS 422 Centronics parallel Dataproducts parallel and Long Lines Ethernet IEEE 1284 parallel Auto Switching Coax or Twinax interface for the printer This menu also allows you to configure several parameters for each interface NETWORK SETUP This option allows you to select from Ethernet Address options and Ethernet Parameters options A
143. col 77 213 Printer Select ANSI Emulation menu 254 Epson FX Emulation 242 Serial Matrix Emulation 234 Printer Tests DIAGNOSTICS 290 Printer Type SPC Type 207 PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL message 337 Printing rates 351 Printing Hex Dump 315 PrintNet Enterprise consumable monitoring 17 Private Mode ANSI Emulation menu 255 Proprinter XL Character Set menu 239 LG 240 PCL II 240 Proprinter XL Emulation 236 20 CPI Condensed 238 Alt Char Set 238 Auto LF 237 Character Set 237 Define CR Code 236 Define LF Code 237 FF Valid at TOF 237 Protect Configs 83 PROTECTED INSTR message 338 PRT CONFIG key 30 Prt Partial Line 171 182 3270 Params menu 189 5250 Params menu 198 Prt to Emulate 164 P Series Character Set menu 225 LG 227 PCL Il 226 PSeries Dbl High 224 P Series Emulation 219 220 221 Alt Set 80 9F 223 Auto LF 222 Character Set 224 Control Code 06 221 Control Code 08 221 Define CR Code 222 Define LF Code 222 FF Valid at TOF 224 LG 221 Overstrike 222 PCL Il 220 PSeries Dbl High 224 P Series SFCC 223 SFCC d Command 224 VFU Select 223 P Series SFCC 78 223 Index P Series XQ Emulation 228 Auto LF 229 Compressed Print 230 Control Code 06 228 Define CR Code 229 Define LF Code 229 Elong Alt Font 230 HS Print High Speed Print 230 Slew Relative 231 Upr Case Select 231 VFU Select 230 PTX Linefeed PCL II Emulation 267 PTX Setup Option MAI
144. d e Disable Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer operation 115 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU 116 ASCII Data Port This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs The data port number needs to match your host system setting e 9100 default e 1023 65535 IPDS Data Port This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the IPDS option is installed The range is 1023 65535 and the factory default is 5001 Keep Alive Timer This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run With the Keep Alive Timer on the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated e 3 Minutes default e 2 10 Minutes Ethernet Speed This menu option only appears if a 10 100Base T network interface card NIC is installed The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different systems and networks The factory default is Auto Select e Auto Select default This setting tells the 10 100Base T NIC to perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex or 100 Full Duplex e 10 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using half duplex e 10 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using full duplex WLAN ADDRESS e 100 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using half dupl
145. d Any element which falls off the current page is reported as an error Debug Mode The printer is put in debug mode whenever a form is defined in Create Form mode Each line of the Create Form is printed along with an error if one occurred This is the same functionality as if there were a slash entered before the Create Form Name Fault When an error occurs the error is printed and the message IGP PGL ERROR appears on the printer front panel The printer then stops printing and goes offline The error must be cleared before the printer can resume normal operation Off No form boundary checking Graphic elements appear clipped if they are beyond the page boundaries European IGP PGL Font Set Menu Select Font see page 129 Standard Arabic Cyrillic Sets Sets Sets 0 ASCII ASMO 449 Code Page 866 1 German ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 2 Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 3 Danish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 4 Norwegian MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 5 Finnish MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 6 English Sakr CP714 7 bit Cyrillic 7 Dutch Aptec CP715 Ukrainian 8 French CP 786 Bulgarian 9 Spanish Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 10 Italian Arabic CP 1046 11 Turkish Arabic Lam 1 12 CP 437 Arabic Lam 2 13 CP 850 Win CP 1256 14 15 Reserved Farsi 1 16 23 Dwn Overlay Farsi 2 24 31 User Def 1098 Farsi 1285 IGP PGL Submenu Factory Default Greek Sets Sets Lat
146. d and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received Alt Set 80 9F e Control Code default Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the Serial Matrix Character Set Menu on page 235 To use one of these sets choose the desired group heading such as European Sets and press ENTER Then choose the desired set within that group such as Roman 8 and press ENTER Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual ESC d command e Even dot plot default Interprets the ESC d command as even dot plot Double high Interprets the ESC d Command as double high Select this option for backward compatibility Serial Matrix Emulation Serial Matrix Character Set Menu Factory Default Character Set from page 232 Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Hebrew Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927
147. d Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Multinational Specifies the print language used by the printer Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual Active Char Set This option selects which group of character sets Primary or Secondary will be active Secondary Set is the default 181 182 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Prt Partial Line e Enable default Forces the printer to print a partial line i e line not ending with a LF before moving to the top of form on the next page e Disable The last partial line of data will not be printed Device ID This parameter defines the printer emulation as 4234 2 or 5225 After the emulation has been changed a POR status is sent to the host 4234 2 is the default Device Address Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6 The host directs data and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique device address After the address has been changed a POR status is sent to the host 5225 World Trade The 5225 emulation has a standard multinational character set that serves as a base and 14 extended world trade character set assortments Cancel IGP DCU e Enable default Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the host or the CANCEL key is pressed e Disable Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is put on h
148. d by a period Figure 27 shows an example of a hex dump Heyes Cyet BO 2i 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E F 0123456789 gt 7 20 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 34 38 3C 3D 3E 3F ABCDEFSHIJALMNG 40 41 42 gt PARSTUVIWXYZENI _ SO Si 52 53 54 55 54 57 58 59 SA SB SC SD SE SF abcdefghijkimno 66 61 62 i 3 parstuvwxyz i 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 20 I BSye C et 0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E F 30 123456789 lt gt 7 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 ABCDEFGH 4 amp 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 OD OA 21 22 23 24 25 26 0123456 27 28 29 BA 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 34 789 lt gt 7 ABCDEF 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 GHIJKLMNOPGRSTUV 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 564 WXYZE I _ abcedef 57 58 59 SA SB 5C SD 5E SF 60 61 62 63 64 65 46 ghijkimnopqrstuy 467 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 wxyz i I 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 20 21i 22 23 24 25 B amp 27 4 01234567 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 3i 32 33 34 35 36 J77 89 lt gt 7 ABCDEFG 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 4A 47 HI 4 4 48 49 OD OA 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C aD 01234567989 lt 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D DY ABCDEFGHIJKLM 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 4B 49 4A 4B 4C 4D NOPGRSTUVWXYZE 4E 4F 50 Si 52 53 54 55 54 57 58 59 SA SB SC 5D abcdefghijkim SE 5F 60 41 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6
149. d slant e Backward Slant Text is printed with a backward slant Slashed Zero This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable Zero is printed without a slash e Enable Zero is printed with a slash Text Position Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space When set to Top of Line text will be positioned at the top of the line space When set to Bottom of Line the text will be positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 Ipi line space The following example shows both Top of Line and Bottom of Line text positions Dot Row Top of Linespace 1 aAanNouahwn Bottom of 8 LPI Linespace 9 10 11 Bottom of 6 LPI Linespace12 Text Position Text Position Top of Line Bottom of Line LinePrinter Plus Emulation Page Format Form Length Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page You can set the form length in inches millimeters mm or as a function of the current Ipi lines per inch Form Width The form width can be specified in inches millimeters or as a function of the current cpi characters per inch The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width Margins e Left Margin Set in columns Column zero is defined as the far left edge of the page and column numbering increments from left to right e Right Margin Set in colum
150. de 233 ESC d command 234 Overstrike 233 Printer Select 234 Serial submenu 98 Baud Rate 102 Buffer Size in K 104 Data Protocol 99 Data Term Ready 103 Framing Errors 105 Idle Response 104 Interface Type 99 One Char Enquiry 105 Parity 102 Poll Character 104 Poll Response 104 Request to Send 103 Stop Bits 1 102 Word Length 102 395 Index Set Lock Key ADVANCED USER menu 288 Set Sharing ADVANCED USER menu 285 Set Text Orientn 174 185 3270 Params menu 191 5250 Params menu 200 SET TOF key 30 SFCC amp Pwrup 154 Power Up F 154 Power Up PY 154 Power Up X 154 VGL SFCC 154 SFCC Char SPC Type 207 SFCC d Command 224 SHUTL INV CMD message 340 SHUTL INV PARM message 340 SHUTL OVR SPEED message 340 SHUTTLE JAM message 340 SHUTTLE STALL message 341 Shuttle Timeout ADVANCED USER menu 286 Signals Centronics Parallel Interface 297 Dataproducts Parallel Interface 295 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 299 Simple Prot Conv 168 Site requirements 22 Skip Cmd Prefix 135 Slash 0 134 155 Slew Relative P Series XQ Emulation 231 396 Slow Paper Slew ADVANCED USER menu 286 SOFTWARE ERROR CYCLE POWER message 341 SPC Char Set SPC Type 208 SPC Coax Params 202 Buffer Print 203 Buffer Reprint 204 Column 132 Wrap 203 Image Buf Size 202 Intervention Req 203 Logical Buf Size 202 NL At MPP 1 205 PA1 204 PA2 204 SPC Null Supp 204 SPC Space Supp 205 Translation Tb
151. de and through the slot to the rear of the top cover For pedestal models with the Quick Access Cover refer to the Quick Setup Guide for paper exiting options 26 Press PAPER ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide Feed sufficient paper to ensure the paper stacks correctly 27 Cabinet models Open the cabinet rear door Make sure the paper is aligned with the label in the output area inside the cabinet Close the front and rear doors 42 Reload Paper Perforation TOF Indicator Vertical Position Knob Figure 14 Aligning the Perforation with the TOF Indicator 28 Align the top of the first print line with the TOF indicator on the tractor by rotating the vertical position knob For best print quality it is recommended that the top of form be set at least one print line or more below the perforation NOTE For exact positioning press the VIEW EJECT key to move the last data printed to the tractor area for viewing While in View mode Printer in View displays Press the Up or Down Arrow keys to move the paper vertically in small increments Pressing the VIEW EJECT key a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print position The key works both online and offline provided that the printer is in View mode This procedure is applicable for both the cabinet and pedestal models 43 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Vertical P
152. ding a space character at the end of the barcode instead e Leading Zero default A leading zero is inserted in front of the data e Trailing Space A space is inserted at the end of the data e X2 DPD When selected an l 2 5 barcode with an X2 magnification will use the specially configured ratios 3 3 6 5 rather than 3 6 9 12 for compatibility issues e Modulo 7 CD The I 2 5 barcode uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of the default modulo 10 check digit Al 00 Spaces This option is designated for EAN UCC 128 barcodes whose application identifier Al is 00 e Disable default The printable data field is printed with the Al enclosed in parentheses This is the standard EAN UCC 128 format e Enable The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated by spaces This option is IGP X00 compatible Select SO Char Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place of SO Shift Out as the control code This allows access for the alternate set of control function characters See the description of the Code 128 barcodes in the IGP PGL Programmer s Reference Manual for details 138 IGP PGL Submenu User Def Ratio e Enable default User defined ratios are accepted for barcodes This is the default e Disable User defined ratios are ignored and the magnification X1 is used in its place Host Form Length Determines whether the form length specified in the CREATE command cha
153. ds data during an unsafe condition data will be lost DTR is not available when RS 422 is selected 101 102 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Baud Rate Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer Baud rate is the speed at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer The choices for the RS 232 and RS 422 interfaces are 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 Baud The default is 9600 Baud NOTE If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200 you may need to use RS 422 or select a lower baud rate to prevent data loss You also may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance Word Length Sets the length of the serial data word The length of the data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host computer Stop Bits 1 Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word Either one or two stop bits can be selected The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in the host computer Parity Set for odd parity even parity mark sense or no parity The setting must match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer Serial Submenu Data Term Ready This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Data Terminal Ready DTR signal is generated This signal indicates if the printer is ready to receive data True default Continuously
154. e ETHERNET N A Status message No action is required DETECTED indicating that the Network Interface Card has established connection EXCESS RBN Yes Displayed when Install a new ribbon WEAR ribbon reaches end Install New RBN of life 329 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User serial interface Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution EXHAUST FAN FLT Yes Sensors cannot Power off the printer and Cabinet model only detect current in remove the paper path fan circuit see Maintenance Manual Check that the fan cable connector is connected Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway and remove any obstructions Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents Power back on the printer If this message appears again contact your authorized service representative FIRMWARE No Application Contact your authorized ERROR software tried to service representative perform an illegal printer function or damaged memory detected on board FM HEADER No Applications Contact your system ERROR software has administrator violated header parameters FRAMING ERROR Yes Serial framing error Check your printer serial interface parameter settings if necessary adjust them so that they match the settings of the attached host 330 Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table
155. e Ignores the SGEA command from the host The printer does not stop when an error is detected instead it substitutes the character selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter Graphic Chek Cod Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable character that is received from the host Choose a hex character from 40 through FE The character becomes the printer default when e the printer is powered off and then powered on e an SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default e the Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled LAC Option Allows the host system to load alternate character images into the printer This may be used for designing graphics barcodes and charts or for printing in foreign languages e Enable default Prints the LAC character as defined e Disable Ignores the LAC definition from the host and prints from the currently selected character set Twinax Params LAC Approx A process that reorganizes columns of dots so that clean readable printing is possible e On default Converts the emulated character cells to standard cells for the P7224 model e Off Converts character cells byte by byte and not by LAC approximation Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages that are printed right to left instead of left to right The options include e Control By Host default e Left
156. e No action is required PROGRAM FROM the new emulation PORT XX program is loading into printer RAM XX indicates how much of the program has loaded 333 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table 8344 FAILED detects hardware failure Displayed Message maior Explanation Solution LOADING No The printer has No action is required PROGRAM INTO deleted the FLASH previous program from flash memory and is loading the new program into flash memory NEW SPX No The printer detects Contact your authorized DETECTED an SPX installed at service representative 1 PRESS ENTER the debug port and the SPX is valid for the printer NON VOLATILE No The flash memory Contact your authorized MEMORY FAILED is defective service representative OLD RIBBON Yes Ribbon was Install a new ribbon Install New RBN previously declared end of life on the installed machine ON LINE N A Printer state No action is required message printer is online and in communication with host ONLINE Yes Poll timeout error Check cable connection 28 CU NOT ENAB The printer was not and host system polled for one minute Coax interface ONLINE No Link level code test Contact your authorized service representative 334 Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Mess
157. e default The printable data field is printed with the Al enclosed in parentheses This is the standard EAN UCC 128 format e Enable The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated by spaces This option is IGP X00 compatible 158 Width Limit Disable default Enable The system will limit the length and width for expanded characters to a limit shown in Table 6 which displays the maximum width allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 0 0 through 4 0 inches Table 6 Width Limit Table IGP VGL Submenu Height Param ssa Height Param erreurs 00 99 21 51 01 99 22 53 02 3 23 56 03 6 24 58 04 8 25 61 05 11 26 63 06 13 27 66 07 16 28 68 08 18 29 71 09 21 30 73 10 23 31 76 11 26 32 78 12 28 33 81 13 31 34 83 14 33 35 86 15 36 36 88 16 38 37 91 17 41 38 93 18 43 39 96 19 46 40 98 20 48 159 Chapter 4 IGP VGL Emulation Absorb After PN e Disable default All line terminators that follow the PN command are sent to the printer and processed e Enable The first motion line terminator that follows the PN command is ignored IGP110 Compatbl This option instructs the VGL to behave similarly to the IGP 10 with respect to certain commands All new users with new applications should select the Disable option Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual e Disable default The IGP does not em
158. e the purpose of this function is to eliminate the necessity of printing unwanted data when print jobs are canceled 3 Press CANCEL NOTE You may need to enable the Cancel option on the front panel See ADVANCED USER on page 281 for details 4 Set the top of form Refer to the Quick Setup Guide 4 The Configuration Menus Configuration Overview IMPORTANT To print data the printer must respond correctly to signals and commands received from the host computer Configuration is the process of matching the printer s operating characteristics to those of the host computer and to specific tasks such as printing labels or printing on different sizes of paper The characteristics which define the printer s response to signals and commands received from the host computer are called configuration parameters You can configure the printer using the configuration menus and the control panel or by sending control codes in the data stream from a host computer attached to the printer This chapter provides an introduction to configuring the printer and includes the configuration menus available depending on which emulation you have installed in the printer Configuration directly affects printer operation Do not change the configuration of your printer until you are thoroughly familiar with the procedures in this chapter 53 54 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Changing Parameter Settings You may change a pri
159. e data stream The commands must have a start and end code Four sets are available e Set1 start code lt default stop code gt e Set 2 start code stop code e Set3 start code _ stop code _ e User Defined Usr Defined HTRN This option is used to set user defined lead in characters The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 5F default e Start Code 2 5F e Stop Code 5B Alt Set 80 9F e Printable default Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex OF e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code 3270 Params Change Case Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case This option is available only in non SCS mode The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed online Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of the following right to left sets Katak Hebrew Old Hebrew and Farsi SCS System Network Architecture Character String mode is controlled by the host computer e Dual Case default e Mono Case Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right e Left to Right default
160. e next available page See Demand Printing on page 329 for detailed information on Simple Tear 277 Chapter 4 PRINTER CONTROL 278 e Form Saver Allows near demand printing for forms that do not have pre printed headers or special application designs At least one blank page is required to load the paper so that it does not slip out of the tractors For shorter form lengths two or more blank pages may be necessary When you press VIEW EJECT the bottom of the printed page is slewed to the tear position When pressed again the paper moves to the top of the next printable page available See Demand Printing on page 329 for detailed information on Form Saver e Out 3 Back 2 A page eject command moves to top of form three times then positions backward for two pages giving the effect of a single page eject e Out 4 Back 2 A page eject command moves to top of form four times then positions backward for two pages giving the effect of a single page eject e Disable Prevents the use of the eject function Open Platen BOF Bottom of Form Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through the print station This parameter when enabled opens and closes the platen when the perforations move across the platen When enabling this parameter you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between perforations PRINTER CONTROL Bar Code Quality Determines the bar code resolution f
161. e set if you want the highest speed e High The emulation prints at 120 x 72 dpi but all alphanumerics and barcodes are automatically printed in dark mode e Best The emulation prints at 120 x 144 dpi and dark mode which produces a higher resolution better looking print image Power on S Mode This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP with respect to certain commands All new users with new applications should select 0 the default option Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual Power on S Mode sets the printer in an SMODE compatibility state at power up The default is 0 disabled no power on mode To use this feature select a mode from 1 through 5 which puts IGP PGL in an SMODE state according to the compatibility mode set If the compatibility mode set is None then MVP is assumed by default For more information see the GP PGL Programmer s Reference Manual Trunc Dyn Data This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the maximum data length specified in Create Mode e Disable the default If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length an error will report e Enable If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length the data truncates 143 Chapter 4 144 IGP PGL Emulation Error Report Sets the error reporting capability for IGP PGL forms On default Form boundary error checking reporte
162. ecting the PA1 menu item will reset the pending PA2 function Buffer Reprint This option is valid only when the printer is printing in SCS mode When the ENTER key is pressed Buffer Reprint Enabled is displayed and an Intervention Required status is sent to the host Pressing ENTER again cancels the Buffer Reprint function and displays Buffer Reprint Disabled Early Print Cmpl Allows the printer to send print order complete status to the host before the printer is actually done printing all data This option is valid only when the printer is in DSC DSE mode e Disable default The printer will suppress the Early Print Complete response until all printing is complete e Enable The printer will send an acknowledgment to the host when it is able to accept more data NOTE When Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs you may lose data Coax Emulation SCS Buffer Cnirl This option is used in Coax LU1 SCS mode only e Don t Wait default The printer does not wait for the job to be printed before sending the print completion to the host e Wait Until Done The printer waits for the job to print before sending the print completion to the host This option speeds up the LU1 job printing for short jobs If you select Don t Wait there is a risk that you may not be able to recover the print job when the printer has fault Cancel IGP DCU e Enable default Cancels all buffers when a job is
163. eed after each carriage return 241 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il 242 Auto LF This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable default Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data past the forms width Define LF Code The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code hex OA from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Line Feed it inserts an additional Carriage Return code hex OD into the data stream This feature is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer e LF LF default Does not add a carriage return with a line feed e LF CR LF Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed Printer Select e Disable default Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes e Enable Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received Epson FX Emulation Character Set This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation as shown in the Epson FX Character Set Menu on page 244 Note that when OCR A or OCR B is selected as the print language the Font Attribute Typeface option under the LinePrinter Plus menu page 214 is changed to OCR A or OCR B respect
164. eek Hebrew Old ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 Arabic CP 1046 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam 1 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Turkish Misc UTF 8 Sets Sets Data Gen Turk Unisys Turkish Block set 10cpi DEC Turkish NCR Turkish Italics Set IBM Turkish PST Turkish Scanblock 10cpi Siemens Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish PGL Thai Set PTT Turkish Code Page 853 IBC Turkish INFO Turkish Bull Turkish Win CP 1254 AS400 Turkish Code Page 857 Code Page Code Page OCR A OCR B Multinational CP 858 EURO 437 850 ASCII USA EBCDIC 239 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il Proprinter XL Character Set Menu with PCL II Character Set Factory Default from page 236 Code Page 437 Code Page 850 OCR A OCR B Latin 2 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859 15 Polish POL1 Mul
165. eived The next print position is print position 1 of the next line e LF LF Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is received The next print position will be the current print position of the next line 229 230 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il Compressed Print Controls which host command sets compressed printing e Char 01 SOH default e Char 03 ETX e Char 09 HT Elong Alt Font Controls which host command sets elongated double high fonts and extended character set e Elng BS Font SO default e Elng SO Font BS HS Print High Speed Print Controls which host command sets high speed printing e Char 02 STX default e Char 03 ETX e Char 09 HT VFU Select Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting The choices are e EVFU default Enables the VFU and selects P Series compatible Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU e DVFU Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit DVFU e CVFU Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit CVFU e Disable Disables all VFU processing P Series XQ Emulation Upr Case Select Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the host computer When enabled all characters will be printed in uppercase e Disable default Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer
166. el Hotport Port Type Centronics see page 91 for options Dataproducts see page 94 for options IEEE 1284 see page 88 for options Disable E Net Adapter see page 106 for options Trickle Time 1 4 sec 1 2 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off Timeout 10 sec 10 60 Report Status Disable Enable 86 Factory Default If Installed Serial Ethernet C T Hotport Hotport Hotport Port Type Timeout Port Type RS 232 10 sec Twinax RS 422 10 60 Coax Disable Disable Trickle Time Timeout 1 4 sec 10 sec 1 2 sec 10 60 1 sec Report Status 2 sec Disable 4 sec Enable 8 sec 16 sec Off Timeout 10 sec 10 60 Report Status Disable Enable Auto Switching Submenu Auto Switching Gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams sequentially With Auto Switching the printer can service hosts attached to the serial parallel Ethernet coax and twinax ports as if they were the only interface connected For example if the host computer sends one print job to the RS 232 serial port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port the printer s Auto Switching is able to handle both jobs in the order they were received The user does not have to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs Port Type Select the types of parallel serial and or C T interfaces which are connected to the printer For example if your printer is atta
167. en invalid barcode data is encountered e Disable VGL will not print an error for illegal barcode data the barcode will be skipped NOTE When the Barcode Errors option is disabled the VGL emulation will try to make the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra digits or adding zeros to the end of barcode data to meet minimum data length requirements for some barcodes Not all errors will be corrected 161 Chapter 4 IGP VGL Emulation Ignore DB8 Setup Following are several options which define character filtering and Data Bit 8 Ignore Chars e Disable default Character filtering is not enabled e Char 1 Character 1 will be filtered Select the option Ignore CH 1 to specify character 1 e Char 2 Character 2 will be filtered Select the option Ignore CH 2 to specify character 2 e Char 1 amp 2 Characters 1 amp 2 will be filtered Select the options Ignore CH 1 and Ignore CH 2 to specify values for these characters Ignore CH 1 Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255 Ignore CH 2 Specifies character 2 for the character filtering option Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255 162 IGP VGL Submenu Data Bit 8 Enable default The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer all 8 bits are used for data bits and characters in the hex 80 FF range can be accessed Disable When the host PI l
168. er Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution B43 ERROR No SDRAM DIMM is Cycle power to see if the SDRAM TOO MANY not compatible with message clears if not BANKS the computer contact your authorized SDRAM DIMM service representative may not be properly installed B44 ERROR No SDRAM DIMM is Cycle power to see if the SDRAM NOT 64 not compatible with message clears if not BITS WIDE the computer contact your authorized SDRAM DIMM service representative may not be properly installed B45 ERROR No SDRAM DIMM is Cycle power to see if the SDRAM IS WRONG not compatible with message clears if not VOLTAGE the computer contact your authorized SDRAM DIMM service representative may not be properly installed B46 ERROR No SDRAM DIMM is Cycle power to see if the SDRAM HAS MIXED not compatible with message clears if not SIZES the computer contact your authorized SDRAM DIMM service representative may not be properly installed B47 ERROR No SDRAM DIMM is Cycle power to see if the SDRAM LARGER not compatible with message clears if not THAN 256M the computer contact your authorized service representative 322 Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution B49 ERROR No SDRAM DIMM is Cycle power to see if the SDRAM LOGICAL not compatible with message clears if not BANKS the compute
169. eration is valid only when the Coax interface is selected as the current interface see HOST INTERFACE on page 85 Active Char Set Selects which group of character sets Primary or Secondary will be active Secondary Set is the default Prt Partial Line e Enable default Forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer i e line not ending with a LF e Disable The last partial line of data will not be printed PA1 PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the coax Systems Network Architecture Character String SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA1 ENABLED message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is put back in Online mode Refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for more information about SCS NOTE Selecting the PA1 menu item again PA1 DISABLED appears on the operator panel or selecting the PA2 menu item will reset the pending PA1 function 171 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 172 PA2 PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the Offline state and the coax SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA2 ENABLED message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is put back in online mode NOTE Selecting the PA2 menu item again PA2 DISABLED appears on the operator panel or sel
170. ernet Parameters menu 117 JOB SELECT key 31 K KDC Port Number WLAN Kerberos menu 122 Keep alive timer Adapter Params menu 112 Keep alive timer Ethernet Parameters menu 116 Keep alive timer WLAN Parameters menu 120 Kerberos Enable WLAN Kerberos menu 121 Kerberos Password WLAN Kerberos menu 122 L Label specifications 347 LAC Approx 185 LAC Option 184 Last Char FF 176 193 Latch Data On Centronics Parallel submenu 92 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines submenu 95 Lead in Chars 173 PTX Transparent 183 LEAP Password WLAN LEAP menu 124 LEAP Username WLAN LEAP menu 124 387 Index LG Emulation Autowrap 272 CR 273 FF 274 Font 271 Horiz Forms 272 2 5 Guard Bars 275 LP 273 Plot Mode Opt 275 Print Mode Opt 274 Unsolicited Rpt 274 Vert Forms 271 Lighter print Integrated Print Management System 48 Line Terminator PCL II Emulation 266 LinePrinter Plus Emulation submenu 209 Barcode X Offset 218 CPI LPI Select 213 Font Attributes 214 Host Command 213 Page Format 217 PCL Il 212 Print Char Set 217 Printer Protocol 213 Reset Cmd CFG Ld 218 Set Substitution 218 LO DRV SHORT message 333 Load Config 82 LOAD PAPER message 333 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX message 333 388 LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH message 334 Loading Used Ribbon 16 Logical Buf Size 202 LP Font 157 LP LG Emulation 273 LPI 154 LPI Adjust PCL II
171. ers Example Changing Parameters Example Factory Default PRINTER CONTROL Ribbon End Open Platen Barcode Tear Bar Point BOF Quality Dist Darker 6 Disable Dark 7 46 in Darker 5 Enable Draft 4 5 10 5 in Darker 4 Darker 3 Darker 2 Darker 1 Tene a Unidirectional Display Accented Lighter 2 Language Char Lighter 3 Disable English Standard Lighter 4 Enable German Tall Lighter 5 French Lighter 6 Italian Lighter 7 Spanish Lighter 8 Portuguese Lighter 9 Lighter 10 A configuration consists of several parameters The default factory configuration has a starting set of parameters In the configuration menu above and in all the configuration menus in this chapter the factory default values are indicated by an asterisk Your print jobs may require parameter values which vary from the default settings This section provides an example procedure for changing individual parameter values The following procedure shows how to change and save the settings for the Barcode Quality and Language options Use these guidelines to navigate the configuration menus and change other parameters 57 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview 58 Dark Step Press LCD Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on 2 ON LINE CLEAR OFFLINE Cc QUICK SETUP 3 ENTER SWITCH Allows you to make lt i gt UNLOCKED configuration changes
172. erver in a LAN or WAN Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting WLAN Address IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting QUICK SETUP Active IGP Emulation The Active Emulation menu enables you to activate ei
173. ex e 100 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using full duplex Job Control The job control mode has three options e Standard default The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job The status line shows done when the job is completely received by the NIC This is the default e Enhanced The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job The status line shows done when the job is fully printed e Off No job synchonization between the NIC and the printer WLAN ADDRESS WLAN Factory Default ADDRESS from page 108 IP Address Subnet Gateway MAC DHCP Mask Address Address XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX hhhhhhhhhhhh Disable Enable IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN 117 118 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s
174. face Active Char Set Specifies which character language set will be the active set e Primary Sets default e Secondary Sets Prt Partial Line e Enable default When this option is enabled it forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer i e line not ending with a LF e Disable When disabled the last partial line of data will not be printed Early Print Cmpl Early Print Complete allows the printer to send Print Complete status to the host before the printer is actually done printing all data Early Print Complete is only available if the IPDS feature is installed Disable default Means the printer will suppress the Early Print Complete response until all printing is complete Enable Means the printer will send an acknowledgement to the host when it is able to accept more data NOTE When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs the data in the printer will remain in the buffer regardless of the setting of the Cancel Buffer option It is recommended that local procedures be followed to recover from the error Do not select Early Print Complete while a print job is in progress If this is done you will need to restart the printer 189 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 190 PTX Transparent Lead in Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard TN3270 emulations To access these features send text commands in th
175. fer Print e Disable default The printer will print normally e Enable The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values Refer to page 315 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout NOTE Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host computer A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print from enable to disable 186 3270 Params 3270 Params 3270 Params from page 167 Char Set Translation Active Char Early Print Prt Partial Select Tbl Set Cmpl Line See the following Secondary Sets Disable Enable page Primary Sets Enable Disable PTX Change Set Text Intervention Compatibility Transparent Case Orientn Req Op bee Chars Dual Case Left to Right Send to Host CR At MPP 1 Satake Mono Case Right to Left Do Not Send NL At MPP 1 Set 2 Position Aft FF Set 3 _ _ Last Char FF User Defined Null Suppression Usr Defined PETAN FF Validity Start Code 1 Auto Skip At End Start Code 2 FF After Job Stop Code CR EM amp NL Alt Set 80 9F Printable Control Code Host Format Max Print Override Control Width Disable Disable 13 2 inches re Enable Enable Printer Width This menu appears only if the TN3270 option is installed 187 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 3270
176. fine LF Select Attributes Format Code Code Select CPI see next page see next page CR CR Disable LF CR LF 10 0 CPI CR CR LF_ Enable LF LF 12 0 CPI 13 3 CPI 15 0 CPI 16 7 CPI 17 1 CPI Select LPI 6 0 LPI 8 0 LPI 3 0 LPI 4 0 LPI Character Printer ESC c Reset Cmd Received Received Private Set Select Sequence CFG Ld CR DEL Mode see next ON DC1 Enable Disable Observe Observe Set 2 page OFF DC3 Disable Power up config Ignore Ignore Set 1 Disable Current config Factory config Pos on BC Check Barcode PUM Truncate PI ETX ACK BC OvrSz Digit darkmode Default Slew Set to top By host Enable Decipoints Truncate at TOF Disable Set to bottom By printer Disable Lines columns Disable Immediate After Print 248 Font Attributes from page 248 ANSI Emulation Factory Default Typeface Prop Bold Print Slashed Spacing Zero Data Processing Disable Disable Disable Gothic NLQ Enable Enable Enable Char Graphics High Speed Italics NLQ Courier NLQ Character Set OCR A from page 248 OCR B Latin 1 8859 1 Latin 9 8859 15 Cyrillic 8859 5 DEC 256 Greek IBM PC 2 CP 437 Turkish CP 857 IBM PC 2 CP 850 USA Slavic CP 852 German Page Format Cyrillic CP 855 French A from page 248 Fr Can CP 863 French B Russian CP 866 French Canadian Greek CP 851 Dutch Netherlds Turkish CP 853 Italian Margins Form Form Width Portug CP 860 United Kingd
177. fore contacting an authorized service representative power off the printer wait 15 seconds then power it back on and rerun your print job If the message reappears press CLEAR If the fault message still displays then contact your authorized service representative 343 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems 344 A Printer Specifications Ribbon Specifications Standard Ribbons Part Number P7000 Ultra Capacity 179499 001 recommended for most text and barcode OCR P7000 High Label 179488 001 recommended for coated or shiny label stock Specialty Ribbons P7000 Red Ribbon 179490 001 P7000 Blue Ribbon 179491 001 P7000 Green Ribbon 179492 001 P7000 Security Ribbon 179493 001 P7000 Quick Dry Ribbon 179494 001 P7000 Tamper Evident 179496 001 P7000 UV Ribbon 179497 001 P7000 Laundry Ribbon 179498 001 345 Appendix A Paper Specifications Paper Specifications 346 Type Thickness Sheet Thickness Drive Edge perforated fan fold 3 to 17 inches 7 62 to 43 18 cm wide 2 to 12 inches 5 08 to 30 48 cm long SureStak Power Stacker option works with forms 5 to 12 inches 12 7 to 30 48 cm long and up to 16 inches 41 cm wide without the paper tent or 15 5 inches 39 5 cm wide with the paper tent installed Single part 15 to 100 pound 6 80 to 45 36 kg stock Multi part 1 to 6 part forms maximum 12 Ib 5 44 kg ply of upper plies 0 025 inch 0 064 cm max
178. front panel it defaults to 10 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change BARCODE 145 This Data Processing font prints at 145 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 12 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change BARCODE 160 This Data Processing font prints at 160 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 13 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change Prop Spacing Proportional Spacing Each printed character is contained inside a character cell The width of the character cell includes the character and the space around the character Disable Each character cell is printed with the same width Each column in the printed text will line up This example is printed with proportional spacing disabled Enable The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character For example i takes less space to print than m Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents which gives text a typeset appearance This example is printed with proportional spacing enabled 215 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il 216 Bold Print e Disable Text is printed normally e Enable Text is printed with a heavy line thickness Italic Print e Disable Text is printed normally e Forward Slant Text is printed with a forwar
179. g tool Line Terminator You can define the action of the line Four options are available LF after CR CR after LF CR after FF and CR after VT Each of these options may be enabled or disabled independent of one another PCL II Emulation PTX Linefeed e Disable disable The default Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from the bottom of the graphics or barcode thereby disrupting the vertical text alignment e Enable The Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top of Form position thereby retaining vertical text alignment When printing graphics or bar codes you may want to set the PTX Linefeed parameter to Enable to maintain text alignment PTX Linefeed Enabled PTX Linefeed Disabled LINE 1 LINE 1 LINE 2 Linefeed LINE 2 are caren F Linefeed LINE 3 LINES 6 LPI Adjust This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch lpi values 6 LPI the default or 8 LPI Page L Lines This parameter lets you set physical page length in lines from 12 to 96 at 6 Ipi or 16 to 128 at 8 cpi The default is 66 lines at 6 Ipi NOTE If 6 Ipi is selected you will be able to scroll the menu to 128 an invalid length However when you press ENTER to select this value the menu will return with the maximum lines for 6 Ipi i e 96 lines Similarly selecting too few lines for 8 Ipi will cause the menu to return with 16 lines 267 Chapter 4 PCL II Emulation 268 Page L Inches Th
180. gh environment If hot or temperatures dusty relocate printer Contact your authorized service representative if this occurs frequently PRINTER HOT Yes Controller board Check printer sensors reporthigh environment If hot or temperatures on dusty relocate printer the board Contact your authorized service representative if this occurs frequently PRINTER UNDER Yes Another user is Wait until the remote user REMOTE accessing the has finished their remote CONTROL printer remotely management session or with the remote management software utility press any key to disable the Printer Manger and gain control of the printer 337 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Firmware error on the controller board Can User F Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PROTECTED No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized board PWR SUPP VOLT No Power supply Replace power supply failed board QUEUE OVERRUN No In CT twinax Contact your authorized emulation the print service representative buffer has overflowed RBN SENSOR No Failure of the Contact your authorized ERROR barcode reader service representative See User Manual sensor REMOVE USED No Status message Contact your authorized SPX An SPX is depleted service representative THEN PRESS because it has ENTER successfully reprogrammed the security key on
181. h Interface Type Maximum Cable Length Centronics Parallel 5 meters 15 feet Dataproducts Parallel 12 meters 40 feet IEEE 1284 Parallel 10 meters 32 feet Serial RS 232 15 meters 50 feet Serial RS 422 1220 meters 4000 feet Coax 1500 meters 4920 feet Twinax 1500 meters 4920 feet Twinax shielded cable 1500 meters 4920 feet Twisted Pair Type 3 300 meters 985 feet Ethernet 10 100Base T 100 meters 328 feet Printer Dimensions Printer Dimensions 41 0 in 57 5 in 27 0 in 104cm 146 1 cm 68 84 cm cor in 73 7 cm a z 83 0 in we 20N 210 8 cm 27 0 n i cm 68 6 cm Figure 1 Printer Dimensions Cabinet Model 23 Chapter 2 Printer Dimensions 59 0 in 149 9 cm 42 5 in 107 8 cm 3 0 in 210 8 cm Figure 2 Printer Dimensions Cabinet Model with Paper Stacker 24 Printer Dimensions 10 5 in 26 67 cm 48 0 in 25 in 63 5 cm Figure 3 Printer Dimensions Pedestal Model 25 Chapter 2 Printer Component Locations Printer Component Locations Barcode Ribbon Ribbon Spool Date Code Label Paper Support Hammer Bank Cover and o ractor 2 Ribbon Mask Vertical Position Knob Blue Trac 7 g Lock 2 Ss RK ah Os Platen Lever Barcode Sensor Platen Stop Ribbon
182. hanges to Config where equals the next available unassigned configuration number If you do not select this option the printer will be brought ONLINE and the changes will be implemented but saved only temporarily until deliberately saved as a new configuration or until you power off the printer 60 Saving Your New Configuration Saving Your New Configuration The Save Config option allows you to save up to eight custom configurations to meet different print job requirements Once you have changed all of the necessary parameters you may save them as a numbered configuration Example 1 on page 62 or a named configuration Example 2 on page 65 that can be stored and loaded later for future use If you do not save your configuration using the Auto Save or this option all of your parameter changes will be erased when you power off the printer Once you have saved a custom configuration using this option it will not be lost if you power off the printer You can load a configuration for a specific print job see Load Config on page 82 You can also modify and resave it You may want to print your configurations see Print Config on page 83 and store them in a safe place such as inside the printer cabinet If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled and you try to resave an existing configuration the new configuration will not be saved until the existing configuration has been deleted see Delete Config
183. he page length in inches e Lines Page Allows the user to set the page length in number of lines Max Line Width Set the maximum line width at either 13 2 inches or the maximum width of the printer Ribbon End Point This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon as being expended The life count will always be from 100 to 0 but if a darker setting is selected 0 will be reached more quickly If a lighter setting is selected the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0 QUICK SETUP Save Config This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print job requirements This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first The factory default configuration cannot be changed See Saving Your New Configuration on page 61 for details Power Up Config This option allows you to specify which of the nine configurations Factory or 1 8 will be the power up configuration 81 Chapter 4 CONFIG CONTROL CONFIG CONTROL The CONFIG CONTROL menu allows you to control your printer s configurations according to the specifications necessary for your print jobs Factory Default CONFIG CONTROL
184. he printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Auto LF The Auto LF option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable default Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data past the forms width Overstrike This option enables you to print bold characters e Enable default Turns on bold print When enabled overstrike printing slows down the printer e Disable Turns off bold print Define LF Code e LF LLF default Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is received The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e LF CR LF Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command received The next print position is print position 1 of the next line 233 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il 234 Printer Select e Disable default Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes e Enable Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is receive
185. he ribbon life or darker shorten the ribbon life If you want to make the print lighter go to Ribbon End Point on page 277 and follow the procedures for adjusting the image density If you are satisfied with the print darkness or if you want to increase the darkness at the end of ribbon life continue with the following steps Blue Tractor Door 2 Platen Lever 7ctrclos Figure 19 Preparing to Load the Ribbon 1 Open the printer cover Raise the platen lever as far as it will go Close the tractor doors PF oO N Remove the old ribbon and discard properly 49 Chapter 3 Right Hub IMPORTANT 50 Integrated Print Management System Date Code Label LPIQWOZ Figure 20 Loading the Barcoded Ribbon 5 Place the full spool on the right hand side ribbon hub and press it into place The full spool has a barcode label on the bottom side and a date code label on the top Once the sensor reads and logs the ribbon barcode the Integrated Print Management System starts to track ribbon usage A date code label is on the top side of the right hand spool If you remove the ribbon during the course of its life and want to re install the same ribbon be sure to place the same spools on the correct hubs Changing Ribbons Ribbon Spool ZPIGQUI ZL Left Hub Ribbon Loading Instructions For Future Reference yeppuoz D Ribbon Guide i Both Sid OY Both Sides Figure 21 Threading the Rib
186. hing Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the IEEE 1284 parallel port buffer You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments Auto Trickle Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer s buffers are almost full the printer will begin to trickle data in at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu until the buffers start to empty out Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use 89 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE 90 For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but
187. ia ianiai iii aradi enea 22 Printer DIMENSIONS een inos ee nnien nn ai a a a 23 Printer Component Locations ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeees 26 Operating The Printer seese 27 Powering On The Printer id satstiaincistiacicsciveueuaraveadivanpeinds 27 Operating Modes ccccceteeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeteneeeteaeesenaeeeenaees 27 The Control Panelis aiie oeeaaeaii naea 28 Control Panel Keys ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeteeeees 29 Operational Procedures eeseeeseesseerrerrreerrrerrrrernrsee 34 Reload Paper neire noi i i iah 34 Unload Papel xsesccciites cetveneis EEEE ETR 45 Table of Contents Integrated Print Management System cceeeeeeeeees 48 Lighter Or Darker Print 0 cccecceeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeteeees 48 Changing Ribbons cccceeececseeeeeeeneeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeee 49 Cancel A Print JOD 0 cecceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeees 52 4 The Configuration Menus 53 Configuration Overview ccccceeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeetaeeeeenees 53 Changing Parameter Settings cccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 54 Saving Parameter Settings c cccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeees 54 Default And Custom Configurations 55 Navigating The Menus e 56 Changing Parameters Example ccccceceeeeeeeees 57 Auto Save Configuration ccccecceseseeeeeseeeeeneeeeaes 60 Saving Your New Configuration ccceeseeeeees 61 Optimizing Print
188. ientation Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option e Enable The operator panel settings override the host commands Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Disable default Reflects distance generated by the VGL feature PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed e Enable Max Print Width Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C T host interface Set for 13 2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the printer All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated e 13 2 inches default e Printer Width the maximum width of the printer 195 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 5250 Params 5250 Params from page 167 Char Set Translation Active Char Prt Partial PTX Select Tbl Set Line Transparent See the following Secondary Set Enable Lead in Chars page Primary Set Disable Set 1 lt gt Set 2 Set 3 _ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 2 Stop Code Alt Set 80 9F Printable Control Code Graphic Graphic Set
189. imum Adjustable tractors 6 pin engagement Labels On Backing Sheet Size Thickness Paper Specifications One part continuous perforated fanfold back form Labels must be placed at least 1 6 inch 0 42 cm from the fan fold perforation Backing adhesive must not be squeezed out during printing 3 to 17 inches 7 62 to 43 18 cm wide including the two standard perforated tractor feed strips A maximum sheet length of 16 inches 40 64 cm between top and bottom perforations NOTE A 16 inch rear door is needed for the cabinet model Power Paper Stacker option is 5 to 12 inches 12 7 to 30 48 cm long Not to exceed 0 025 inch 0 064 cm including backing sheet 347 Appendix A_ Printer Weight And Dimensions Printer Weight And Dimensions Cabinet Type Dimensions Weight Height Width Depth Unpacked Packaged Floor Cabinet 42 5 inches 27 inches 29 inches 225 lbs 285 Ibs Pedestal 35 inches 26 inches 21 inches 105 Ibs 115 Ibs With a power stacker the weight increases by 21 lbs and the depth increases by 4 75 inches for a deeper rear door With the ZTP option the weight increases by 12 lbs and the height is increased by 7 inches Environmental Characteristics Temperature Operating 50 to 104 F 10 to 40 C up to 5000 feet 1524 meters 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C up to 8000 feet 2438 meters Storage 40 to 158 F
190. in 2 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Mazovia Kamenicky Roman 8 PC 437 Slavic Slavic 1250 Code Page 865 Code Page 860 Latin 1 8859 1 Latin 5 8859 9 Latin 9 8859 15 Polish POL1 Win CP 1250 Win CP 1252 Win CP 1257 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 851 Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 Win CP 1253 Greek 813 EURO Greek 869 EURO Misc Hebrew Turkish Sets Sets Hebrew Old Data Gen Turk Hebrew New DEC Turkish Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Latin 1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish Win CP 1255 PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Sets Block set 10cpi Italics Set UTF 8 Scanblock 10cpi PGL Thai Set 145 Chapter 4 IGP VGL Emulation IGP VGL Emulation Code V Graphics language VGL is an Intelligent Graphics Printing IGP software emulation designed for your Line Matrix printer The IGP Code V emulation of the QMS Code V Version II programming language produces online forms barcodes and alphanumeric text generation The graphics processing features are detailed below Features OnLine Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with the preprinted look for each application VGL program
191. ine is enabled Data Bit 8 internally indicates PI line status To use the PI line disable Data Bit 8 and enable the Host PI configuration option under the PI Control option below NOTE Data Bit 8 is interpreted as either Data Bit 8 or PI signal but never both When enabled as Data Bit 8 Data Bit 8 has priority over the PI signal and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpret PI line data Conversely when Data Bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used Data Bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function and you cannot access characters in the hex 80 FF range Therefore to access characters in the hex 80 FF range Data Bit 8 must be enabled Font Set The Font Set specifies which language is currently selected for use with the VGL Refer to IGP VGL Font Set Menu on page 165 for available selections PI Control Printer PI Disable default The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line disabled Enable The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled 163 Chapter 4 164 IGP VGL Emulation Host PI Disable default The host does not send PI signals e Enable The host sends PI signals The Data Bit 8 configuration option must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer Max PI 16 e Enable default A paper slew of 0 15 will move 1 16 lines e Disable A paper slew of 1 15 will move 1 15 lines A paper slew of 0 will al
192. inter when the Ready Line is true and the ON LINE key on the control panel has been pressed When the printer is in online mode it may accept data from the host Demand Data Request Carries a high true signal from the printer when the printer is ready to accept character data from the host This signal changes to false shortly after the leading edge of the data strobe signal Cable Verify Two pins on the interface connector are jumpered together to allow the user to verify proper installation of the interface connector Buffer Clear A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a reboot Parity Error Always carries a low false signal from the printer indicating there is no parity error 295 Chapter 5 Centronics Parallel Interface Centronics Parallel Interface Table 9 Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin DATA LINE 1 2 ACKNOWLEDGE 10 CHASSIS GROUND 17 Return 20 Return 28 DATA LINE 2 3 ONLINE 13 GROUND 30 Return 21 Return 28 DATA LINE 3 4 FAULT 32 Spares 14 Return 22 Return 29 DATA LINE 4 5 PAPER EMPTY 12 No Connection 34 35 Return 23 Return 28 36 DATA LINE 5 6 BUSY 11 5 Volts 18 Return 24 Return 29 DATA LINE 6 7 Return 25 DATA LINE 7 8 Return 26 DATA LINE 8 9 Return 27 DATA STROBE 1 Return 19 PAPER INSTRUCTION 15 Return 29 PRIME 31 Return 30 The length of the data cable from
193. ion menu 253 Epson FX Emulation 242 Proprinter XL Emulation 237 P Series XQ Emulation 229 Serial Matrix Emulation 233 Auto Locking ADVANCED USER menu 284 Auto Save Configuration 60 Auto Skip At End 177 194 Auto Switching submenu 86 Auto Switching submenu 87 Port Type 87 Report Status 88 Timeout 88 Trickle Time 87 Auto Trickle Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines submenu 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 89 Index Auto Uppercase 135 Autowrap 133 Autowrap LG Emulation 272 B B10 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED message 319 B11 ERROR RAM TEST FAILED message 319 B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING message 319 B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE message 319 B19 ERROR DC RETURNED message 320 B20 STATUS 00 DOWNLOAD MODE message 320 B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET message 320 B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE message 320 B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM message 321 B30 STATUS INITIALIZING 321 B35 WAITING FOR EC STATUS 321 B40 ERROR PROM CKSUM BAD message 321 B41 ERROR DIM MEMORY NOT SDRAM message 321 B42 ERROR SDRAM ROWS NOT ALLOWED message 321 B43 ERROR SDRAM TOO MANY BANKS message 322 373 Index B44 ERROR SDRAM NOT 64 BITS WIDE message 322 B45 ERROR SDRAM IS WRONG VOLTAGE message 322 B46 ERROR SDRAM HAS MIXED SIZES message 322 B47 ERROR SDRAM LARGER THAN 256M message 322 B49 ERROR SDRAM LOGICAL BANKS message 323 B50 ERROR SDRAM LOGIC COMB BANKS mes
194. ion only applies to the builds with IGP This option is not available in the PCL II or LG emulation Shuttle Timeout The amount of time the shuttle continues moving after no data is received If your host is slow setting the number to a higher value will prevent the printer from spending time shuttling up and down between data bursts Slow Paper Slew e Disable default The paper will slew and stack paper at maximum speed e Enable Causes the paper to stack at a slower rate This ensures that certain forms will stack neatly Alarm e On default An audible alarm sounds 3 beeps when a fault occurs such as a paper jam e Cont Beep A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR e Off No audible alarm will sound ADVANCED USER Power Saver Time The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time before the printer goes into Power Saver mode When Instant is chosen the printer goes into Power Saver mode as soon as it is able to stop the shuttle properly The time allotted to perform this function depends upon the shuttle timeout value which can be set in the menu Pressing any key will remove the power saver message from the control panel Sending a print job to the printer will turn off power saver mode Pwr Save Control Allows you to enable or disable the Power Save Energy Star mode e Enable default Allows you to enable the
195. is information softcopy the photographs and color illustrations may not appear For online versions of this book we authorize you to e Copy modify and print the documentation contained on the media for use within your enterprise provided you reproduce the copyright notice all warning statements and other required statements on each copy or partial copy e Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related Printronix product which may be either machines you own or programs if the program s license terms permit a transfer You must at the same time destroy all other copies of the documentation You are responsible for payment of any taxes including personal property taxes resulting from this authorization Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization Upon termination you must destroy your machine readable documentation 357 Appendix C Energy Star Energy Star 358 st HAG The Environmental Protection Agency ENERGY STAR Computers program is a partnership effort with manufacturers of data processing equipment to promote the introduction of energy efficient personal computers monitors printers fax machines and copiers to help reduce air pollution and global warming caused by electricity generation Printronix participates in this program by introducing printers that reduce power consumption when they are not being used As an ENERGY ST
196. is parameter allows you to set physical page length from 2 to 16 inches in increments of half an inch The default is 11 inches Config Print This option prints the emulation s parameters and the currently selected values Symbol Set Print This option prints a list of all the available sets The character set number prints to the left of the character set sample Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to resetting printer variables the selected configuration will be loaded e Power Up Config default The power up configuration is loaded when the reset command is received e Current Config If you have preset and presaved multiple configurations then the currently selected presaved configuration is loaded when the reset command is received e Disable The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and continues to use the currently loaded configuration e Factory Config The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is received LG Emulation LG Emulation EMULATION Factory Default from page 166 Vert Forms Horiz Forms Autowrap CR See next page Bot Frm 66 6 Left Mrg 66 0 No CR Top Mrg 0 6 Right Mrg 13 2 Yes CR LF Bot Mrg 66 6 LF FF Unsolicited Print Mode Plot Mode Rpt Opt Opt LF FF No Enable En
197. ived by printer TXD TXD Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and control information to the host Subject to protocol selection NOTE RXD and TXD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal 6 Reprogramming The Security Key Reprogramming The Security Key The security key on the PSA3 controller board can be reprogrammed with a Software Program Exchange SPX module The SPX is an intelligent module that plugs into the debug port on the back of printers equipped with the PSA3 Hurricane controller board The SPX is used only once it automatically overwrites itself after successfully reprogramming a security key This allows the end user or a service technician to enable features such as new emulations without having to remove covers and install a new security key on the controller board The SPX is used at power up only and is not left in the printer during normal operation Because it is a single use disposable item the user is not required to return it to the vendor or manufacturer How To Program The Security Key 1 Power off the printer 2 On cabinet models open the rear door On pedestal models refer to Figure 25 to locate the debug port at the rear of the printer 3 Insert the SPX into the debug port as shown 307 Chapter 6 Reprogramming The Security Key SPX Debug Port Figure 25 Inserting The SPX into the Debug Port
198. ively To use one of these sets choose the desired group heading such as European Sets and press ENTER Then choose the desired set within that group Such as Roman 8 and press ENTER Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual 20 CPI Condensed Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page e Enable default Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer For example a 12 CPI Draft font will compress to 20 CPI Disable Does not compress print widths even if condensed print is chosen by the host Alt Set 80 9F e Control Code default Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F 243 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il Epson FX Character Set Menu Factory Default Character Set from page 241 Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Hebrew Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets See next ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old page ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew
199. l 203 Usr Defined HTRN 203 SPC Null Supp 204 SPC Space Supp 205 SPC Twx Params 206 207 Buffer Print 208 SPC Type 207 Translation Tbl 208 SPC Type 207 EVFU 208 Printer Type 207 SFCC Char 207 SPC Char Set 208 Usr Defined HTRN 207 Special information 18 Specifications interfaces 351 label 347 paper 346 Speed print 351 SPX FOUND ERROR KEY NOT DETECTED message 341 SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS ENABLED message 341 STACK FAULT message 342 STACK OVERFLOW message 341 STACK UNDERFLOW message 341 STACKER FULL message 342 STACKER JAM message 342 Standard CTHI 167 Stop Bits 1 Serial submenu 102 Submenu IGP PGL 129 IGP PGL with LG 132 IGP PGL with PCL Il 131 IGP VGL 148 IGP VGL with LG 152 IGP VGL with PCL II 150 Subnet mask Adapter Address menu 109 Ethernet Address menu 114 WLAN Address menu 118 Support technical 20 Symbol Set Print PCL II Emulation 268 System Memory DIAGNOSTICS 291 Index T TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN message 342 TCB CORRUPTED message 342 TCP PORT BUSY message 342 Tear Bar Dist Distance PRINTER CONTROL 279 Technical support 20 Terminating resistor configurations 302 Test Width DIAGNOSTICS 289 Ticket Lifetime WLAN Kerberos menu 122 Timeout Auto Switching submenu 88 TOF Action Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines submenu 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 89 Translate Table 178 Tra
200. l Panel 128 IGP PGL SUBMENU airaa aeara rieira 129 IGP PGL Submenu with PCL Il naassen 131 IGP PGL Submenu with LG 132 IGP VGL Emulation aniei eaa aat aa 146 FedtuUre Si a r ra e el th ed ater iara 146 Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel 147 IGP VGL SUBMENU morri w a 148 IGP VGL Submenu with PCL II naassen 150 IGP VGL Submenu with LG 152 EMULATION gloer a aR a A T tae titeans 166 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 0 ccceceeeeeeeeteeeeeteeees 167 Standards maiu a e ees ren Mie ea ea 167 Simple Prot Conv aeui wala a eak iiaa 168 Coax EMUulation cccccccccccessssssssseeeeseeeeesseesssssseeeees 169 TWinax Params 42 cee eecetin Bete ected eee 180 3270 Param ses ma Mee aa E iag 187 5250 ParadM Siirsin n eaa aaiae 196 SPC Coax Params 0 ccccescceecceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeessneeeeeessaas 202 SPC TWX Param cccccccccccccceseessseaeeeeeseeeeessessesssnaeees 206 LinePrinter Plus Emulation ecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 209 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il cceeeeee 212 P Series Emulation ccccccccccsssseecesesseeeessssneeeesees 219 P Series Emulation with PCL Il 0 a 220 P Series Emulation with LG 221 P Series XQ Emulation ccccccesscceesssseeeeessteeeeeees 228 Serial Matrix Emulation cccccccccsssseeesssseeeesesees 232 10 Table of Contents Proprinter XL Emulation s e 236 Epson FX Emulation esiisa ana inn A e 241
201. l not display on the control panel 105 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE 106 E Net Adapter Submenu Factory Default E Net Adapter from page 85 Buffer Size in K 16 1 16 The E Net Adapter interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather than attach the host directly into the printer The detailed configuration of this option is given in the PrintNet User s Manual Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet buffer You can specify between 1 16 Kbytes The default is 16 Kbytes Ethernet Submenu Ethernet Submenu Factory Default Ethernet from page 85 Buffer Size in K 16 1 16 The Ethernet interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather than attach the host directly into the printer The detailed configuration of this option is given in the Network Interface Card User s Manual Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet buffer You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments The default is 16 Kbytes 107 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU NETWORK SETUP MENU NETWORK SETUP from page 70 ADAPTER ADDRESS 1 ADAPTER PARAMS ETHERNET ADDRESS 2 ETHERNET PARAMS 2 WLAN ADDRESS 3 See page 109 See page 110 See page 113 See page 115 See
202. lashes in Ignore Dots Append Truncate True Vert UPC Zeros Rotated Alpha 1 10 Descenders Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Disable Rot Char Ignore Midline PY Convert Absorb After IGP110 Size Spaces to U C APN Compatbl Adjusted Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Not Adjusted Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 151 Chapter 4 EMULATION from page 70 IGP VGL IGP VGL Emulation IGP VGL Submenu with LG Factory Default Graphics Error Ignore DB8 Options Handling Setup Control Char 6 see next page Error Msgs Ignore Nulls 5E 7 Enable Disable Ignore Mode 8 Disable Enable Disable 9 Error Markers Data Bit 8 Enable 10 Enable Enable Free Format Disable Disable Disable Offpage Errors Enable Disable Mgnum Conversion Enable Disable Barcode Errors Enable Enable Disable Font Set ae 0 Printer Pl 1 33 Disable Enable Host PI Disable Enable Max PI 16 Enable Disable 152 Graphics Options from page 152 Slash 0 Enable Disable Ignore Dots Disable Enable Append Rotated Disable Enable Truncate IGP VGL Submenu Factory Default Alpha Enable Disable True Vert 1 10 Disable Enable Absorb After APY Absorb Motion Absorb All Disable
203. lation 261 2 5 Selection 138 l 2 5 Guard Bars LG Emulation 275 125 Selection 158 Idle Response Serial submenu 104 Index IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 88 Auto Trickle 89 Buffer Size in K 89 Offline Process 90 Prime Signal 89 TOF Action 89 Trickle Time 89 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 298 Byte Mode 298 Compatibility Mode 298 Nibble Mode 298 Signals 299 Ignore Lxx Cmd 160 Ignore CH 1 162 Ignore CH 2 162 Ignore Char 140 Ignore Chars 162 Ignore Dots 155 Ignore Spaces 157 Ignore DB8 Setup 162 Data Bit 8 163 Ignore CH 1 162 Ignore CH 2 162 Ignore Chars 162 IGP PGL Emulation 126 configuring with the control panel 128 IGP PGL submenu 129 Auto Uppercase 135 Autowrap 133 Barcode Options 137 Compatbl Mode 141 385 Index Compressed CPI 140 CR Edit 134 Define CR Carriage Return Code 133 Define LF Line Feed Code 133 Error Report 144 Expanded Font 141 Ext Execute Copy 136 Forms Handling 135 Host Form Length 139 Ignore Char 140 LG 132 PCL II 131 PGL SFCC 133 PI Slew Range 134 Power On IGP PGL 136 Power on S Mode 143 Print Quality 143 Printer PI Line 142 Scalable Size 142 Select Font 134 Select LPI 135 Skip Cmd Prefix 135 Slash 0 134 True Form Slew 142 Trunc Dyn Data 143 Var Form Adjust 139 Var Form Type 140 IGP PGL Font Set menu 145 IGP VGL Emulation 146 configuring with the control panel 147 IGP
204. le Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU commands when the PI signal is true Data Polarity The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your host computer e Standard default Does not expect the host computer to invert the data e Inverted Expects the data received on the data lines from the host computer to be inverted Ones become zeros and vice versa Resp Polarity The Resp Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of your host computer e Standard default Does not invert the response signal e Inverted Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer Busy On Strobe e Enable default Asserts a busy signal after each character is received e Disable Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full Latch Data On Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data strobe signal Centronics Parallel Submenu Prime Signal e Enable default The parallel port will perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal e Disable The parallel port will not perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal TOF Action e Reset default A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled e Do Nothing Nothing occurs before a warm start when the
205. le Disable Enable 8 0 Enable Disable Auto Eject 9 0 Auto TOF 10 0 Power On Ext Execute Barcode Host Form Var Form Var Form IGP PGL Copy Options Length Adjust Type Enable Disable see Disable 00 0 inches Add Nothing Disable Enable page 136 Enable 1 3 0 inches Add 0 Add X Compressed Ignore Compatbl Expanded Scalable p CPI Char Mode Font Size Disable Ignore Mode None Scalable Normal Light Font Disable MVP Block Block Dark Font Enable L150 Alt Block 1 Select Char P3000 Alt Block 2 0 P6000 0 255 P9000 129 Chapter 4 IGP PGL Emulation Factory Default lt _ 130 IGP PGL Continued True Form Printer Pl Print Power on Trunc Dyn Error Slew Line Quality S Mode Data Report Enable Enable Data Processing o Disable On Disable Disable High 0 5 Enable Debug Mode Best Fault Off IGP PGL Submenu with PCL II IGP PGL Submenu with PCL II Factory Default EMULATION from page 70 IGP PGL Define CR Define LF Autowrap PGL PI Slew CR Edit Code Code SFCC Range CR CR LF LF Disable 7E 16 Disable CR CR LF LF CR LF Enable 15 Enable Select Select LPI Auto Skip Cmd Power On Ext Execute Font Uppercase Prefix IGP PGL Copy
206. le movement If fault source is not apparent contact your authorized service representative SOFTWARE No Application Contact your authorized ERROR software tried to service representative CYCLE POWER perform illegal printer function or damaged logic circuits found on controller board SPX FOUND No The controller Contact your authorized ERROR board does not service representative KEY NOT have a security DETECTED key SPX NOT NEEDED No Options included Contact your authorized OPTIONS on the SPX are service representative ENABLED already installed on the host printer STACK No Fatal firmware Contact your authorized board STACK No Firmware error on Contact your authorized UNDERFLOW the controller board service representative 341 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User reported by the Printer Manager when ethernet interface option is installed Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution STACKER FAULT Yes Stacker is not Check for obstructions in functioning the stacker area If fault correctly persists contact your authorized service representative STACKER FULL Yes Power stacker is Remove paper full of paper STACKER JAM Yes This message is 1 Open the cabinet rear triggered if there is door and check for paper inside the obstructions preventing throat of the elevator movement stacker elevator
207. lection Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual SFCC d Command e Even dot plot default This option interprets SFCC d Command as even dot plot e Double High This option interprets SFCC d Command as double high Select this option for backward compatibility PSeries Dbl High Allows printing compatibility between current and older model printers e Normal default This is normal double high printing for current model printers e P3 4 6 9 Compat Where older printers print two dot rows higher this option allows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match the current models dot row value two dot rows lower FF Valid at TOF e Enable default Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form e Disable Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form Character Set from page 219 P Series Character Set Menu P Series Emulation Factory Default UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Hebrew Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708
208. line This is useful in printing forms and text together or in mixing different fonts on a print line Use of multiple densities and reverse paper feed also affects throughput 351 Appendix A Printing Rates 352 ASCII Character Set KEY B7 Bg Bits P5 B4B3B2B1 OCTAL equivalent lt DECIMAL equivalent 1B HEX equivalent C ascil Character Name N DAD NAN woorlnns NIOANIWADIWDAD IWOAIH wan H DDOINGANIDAD THA AAMOR gt i La WAMN OWAN IW nje onjo n TNAN IMNAD O AlOorIWO wo 353 Appendix B 354 C Communication Notices Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A Printronix may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your Printronix representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an Printronix product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Printronix product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any Printronix intellectual property rights may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non Printronix product program or service Printronix may have patents or pending patent applications covering subjec
209. ll be used by IPDS e Select By Host default The font ID is only affected by host commands e Standard The font ID is converted to a decompressed font ID e Compressed The font ID is converted to a compressed font ID Print Quality This parameter chooses the print quality e Select By Host the default The application decides the print quality Default Font The default font the printer uses Graphics Quality This parameter chooses the print quality of graphics e High default Graphics are printed at 144 dot rows per inch e Select By Host The application decides the quality of the graphics e Low Graphics are printed at 72 dot rows per inch Barcode Quality This parameter chooses the horizontal print quality of barcode labels e High default Label is printed at 144 dots per inch e Select By Host The application decides the quality of the labels e Low Label is printed at 72 dots per inch 259 Chapter 4 260 IPDS Emulation Barcode Speed This parameter chooses the vertical print quality of barcode labels High default Barcodes are printed with less vertical dots increasing printing speed but decreasing print quality Select By Host The application decides the quality of the labels Low Barcodes are printed with more vertical dots decreasing printing speed but increasing print quality Barcode Size This parameter will emulate the barcode sizes of the selected pri
210. lue are identical in length Absorb After PY Absorb Motion default The first paper motion following a APY command is ignored Absorb All The system ignores all the data and terminator until a host generated motion terminator is detected Disable System terminators following a graphics command are sent to the printer and result in paper motion UPC Descenders Enable default UPC EAN barcodes are printed with descenders even if there is no human readable data Disable UPC EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data Rot Char Size Adjusted default Rotated clockwise counterclockwise expanded characters have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size parameters Not Adjusted Rotated expanded characters are the same size as unrotated characters with the same size parameters IGP VGL Submenu Ignore Spaces e Disable default Trailing spaces are not deleted from alphanumeric elements in a graphics pass e Enable Trailing spaces are deleted from alphanumeric elements in a graphics pass Midline PY includes PN e Disable default The Graphics mode Enable command PY must be the first three characters of a line e Enable The PY or PN can occur anywhere in a line Print Quality e Data Processing default ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in normal mode at 60 x 72 dpi This mode should be set if the highest speed is desired
211. n default Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the next form e Off Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first print line on the next form 3270 Params Last Char FF Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code encountered in the print buffer e On default Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form e Off Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form NOTE This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on If configured as a 3287 and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form regardless of the setting of this option Null Suppression e Off default Ignores nulls The print position does not move e On Treats nulls as blank spaces FF Validity Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution e Off default Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line or at Maximum Print Position 1 A form feed command at any other position is recognized as a space e On Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the data stream 193 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 194 Auto Skip At End Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a print buffer If form feed is the last char
212. n for the forms You must specify the bottom margin in lines at 6 lines per inch ranging from 0 to 198 lines 33 inches The default setting is 66 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0 so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected Horiz Forms Left Mgr 0 00 default This sets the left margin for the forms You must specify the left margin in 1 10 inch increments from 0 to 13 1 inches The default value is 0 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other Right Mrg 13 2 This sets the right margin for the forms You must specify the right margin in 1 10 inch increments from 0 1 to 13 2 inches The default value is 13 2 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other Autowrap This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of text exceeds the right margin No default Any print data received past the forms width setting is discarded Yes An automatic carriage return and line feed is performed when data is received past the forms width setting
213. n printing for three minutes continually and the sensor has not detected any growth in the paper stack the stacker raises itself 1 4 inch automatically e Enable default The automatic elevator on the power stacker operates normally e Disable The stacker does not raise automatically every three minutes and is entirely dependent on the sensor Diable is used with extremely high quality print jobs that take a long time to print Auto Locking e Disable default The ENTER key must be locked manually e Enable The printer automatically locks the ENTER key five minutes after the last front panel key press IMPORTANT ADVANCED USER File System e Overwrite Files Allows you to prevent files from being overwritten by disabling the overwrite function e View File List Displays the list of files in the file system Pressing the DOWN key displays the file size e Delete Files Displays the list of files in the file system Pressing the ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the front panel Flash Avail The amount of flash available for the user to save or download files into flash e Optimize amp Reboot Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files After pressing ENTER wait for the printer to reboot NOTE When the Optimize amp Reboot option is executed the message Optimizing Flash Files does not display before printer rebooting takes place e Print File List Prints a summary of the files stored in flash mem
214. ned herein was determined in a controlled environment Therefore the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Some measurements may have been made on development level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems Furthermore some measurement may have been estimated through extrapolation Actual results may vary Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment Information concerning non Printronix products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources Printronix has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non Printronix products Questions on the capabilities of non Printronix products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products Printronix encourages owners of information technology IT equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed Printronix offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products Information on these product recycling offerings can be found on Printronix s Internet site at http Awww printronix com Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the information and Communication Statements on page 360 If you are viewing th
215. ng the block with an End of Text ETX signal When the printer receives the ETX signal it will acknowledge the ETX thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data ACK NAK ACK means acknowledge the device acknowledges it has accepted a transmission NAK means negative acknowledge the device did not receive the transmission 99 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE 100 SERIES1 1 CHAR The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters sent to the host If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75 percent of the buffer size the online or offline and buffer full response character is sent If the buffer is completely full an online or offline buffer full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline the appropriate response character is sent If the idle response option is enabled the printer will send a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size If a poll character is received configurable from the Poll Character xx Hex option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF the printer will send a response character n milliseconds later configurable from the Poll Character xx MS on the front panel from 0 through 30 This n milliseconds is called the poll delay The poll character will be remo
216. nges the form length designated in the LP menu see LinePrinter Plus Emulation on page 209 when the form is printed by the EXECUTE command e Disable default The LP form length is unaffected by the form being printed e Enable The LP form length changes to match the length of the PGL form being printed Var Form Adjust Ranges from 0 30 Default is 0 This menu value is tenths of inches The value of this menu specifies the amount of distance to add to PGL forms that have variable form lengths Variable length forms are forms that are defined by using a 0 in the CREATE statement CREATE FORM 0 Variable form lengths are defined by the contents within the form the form is only as long as necessary to print the form Changing this menu value adds additional lengths to the form in tenths of inches Again this only applies to forms that use the 0 variable length forms 139 Chapter 4 IGP PGL Emulation Var Form Type This menu option applies only to the host command CREATE NAME or CREATE NAME DISK The option also applies to the host command CREATE NAME followed by 0 X or a form length number that always overrides the menu option e Add Nothing default No action e Add 0 When selected the form length ends at the longest printed element Same as CREATE NAME 0 e Add X When selected the form length is the same as the physical page length Compressed CPI This parameter allows you t
217. nments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data RXD 2 Transmit Status amp Control 3 Chassis Signal Ground 5 Data TXD Clear To Send CTS 8 Request To Send RTS 7 Data Set Ready DSR 6 Data Terminal Ready DTR 4 Data Carrier Detect DCD 1 Receive Data RXD Serial data stream to the printer Transmit Data TXD Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting status and control information to the host Subject to protocol selection Request To Send RTS Control signal from the printer Subject to configuration 305 Chapter 5 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces 306 Clear To Send CTS Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready to receive data status signals from the printer Data Set Ready DSR Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a ready condition Data Carrier Detect DCD Status signal to the printer The ON condition is required for the printer to receive data Data Terminal Ready DTR Control signal from the printer Subject to configuration RS 422 Table 14 PSA3 RS 422 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data 1 Transmit Data 3 Chassis Signal 5 RXD TXD Ground Receive Data 6 Transmit Data 8 RXD TXD RXD RXD Serial data stream differentially rece
218. not reflect distance generated by the IGP VGL feature IGP PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed Coax Emulation Max Print Width Set the maximum print width at either 13 2 inches or the maximum width of the printer Buffer Print e Disable default The printer will print normally e Enable The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values Refer to page 315 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout NOTE Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host computer A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print from enable to disable 179 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Twinax Params CTHI from page 167 Roses Factory Default Standard Twinax Params Char Set Active Char Prt Partial Device ID Device Select Set Line Address see next page Secondary Set Enable IPDS Address 1 Primary Set Disable 5225 Address 0 6 4234 2 5225 World Cancel PTX Graphic Chek Graphic Chek LAC Option Trade IGP DCU Transparent Err Cod Standard Char Enable Lead in Chars Enable 60 Enable Extended Char Disable Set 1 lt gt Disable 40 FE hex Disable Set 2 Set
219. ns Following are several options which configure printing output Slash 0 This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable default Zero is printed without a slash e Enable Zero is printed with a slash Ignore Dots e Disable default e Enable Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only 1 10ths of an inch If the dot position is also given it is treated as text Append Rotated e Disable default Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate elements e Enable Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise counterclockwise or inverted orientation Truncate Alpha When enabled this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 Element Off Page Error if alphanumeric data including spaces extends beyond the right side of the form The options include e Enable default e Disable 155 Chapter 4 156 IGP VGL Emulation True Vert 1 10 Enable default A vertical 1 10 inch parameter is used as 1 10 inch Rounding occurs to the nearest 1 72 inch This can cause vertical moves that have the same value to differ by 1 72 inch Disable A vertical 1 10 of an inch parameter is used as 7 72 of an inch The absolute move is slightly smaller than expected For example a one inch move would be 70 72 of an inch Vertical moves that have the same va
220. ns Column zero is defined as the far right edge of the page and column numbering increments from right to left Bottom Margin Defined in lines starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up Perforation Skip e Disable Allows printing on page perforation e You may set up a skip over margin of 1 2 inch 2 3 inch 5 6 inch or 1 inch For example a skip over margin of 1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at the bottom of the page Print Char Set When this selection is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed the current character set is printed 217 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il 218 Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command ESC or ESC k in addition to resetting printer variables the selected configuration is loaded e Disable default The active emulation parameters are loaded when the reset command is executed e Power Up Config The power up configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Current Config The currently selected configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed Factory Config The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed Set Substitution When this option is activated the character set overlay in RAM is activated This can also be accomplished through a host command of SFCC Rx In either case a flag is set indicating that the substit
221. nse may be terminated by agreement between you and Printronix Inc or by Printronix Inc If you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected within thirty 30 days after notice When this License is terminated you shall return to the place you obtained them the printer and all copies of the Software and documentation U S Government Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 242 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY BY USING THIS PRINTER YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT User s Manual The Printronix P7000 Series PSA3 Printers PRINTRONIX This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright No part of this document may be reproduced copied translated or
222. nslation Tbl 171 203 3270 Params menu 189 5250 Params menu 197 SPC Twx Params 208 Transmit Data TD RS 232 305 Trickle Time Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines submenu 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 89 Trickle Time Auto Switching submenu 87 True Form Slew 142 397 Index True Vert 1 10 156 Trunc Dyn Data 143 Truncate Alpha 155 Truncate PI Slew ANSI Emulation menu 256 Twinax Params menu 180 5225 World Trade 182 Active Char Set 181 Buffer Print 186 Cancel IGP DCU 182 Char Set Select 181 Device Address 182 Device ID 182 Format Control 186 Graphic Chek Cod 184 Graphic Chek Err 184 Host Override 185 LAC Approx 185 LAC Option 184 Max Print Width 186 Prt Partial Line 182 PTX Transparent 183 Set Text Orientn 185 U UNDEF INTERRUPT message 343 UNDFNED OPCODE message 343 Unidirectional PRINTER CONTROL 279 UNKNOWN RBN1 message 343 UNKNOWN RBN2 message 343 Unload paper 45 Unsolicited Rpt LG Emulation 274 UP DOWN key 31 398 UP DRV SHORT message 343 UP or DOWN key 31 UPC Descenders 137 156 Upr Case Select P Series XQ Emulation 231 User Def Ratio 139 Usr Defined HTRN 174 203 Usr Defined HTRN PTX Transparent 183 Usr Defined HTRN SPC Type 207 V Var Form Adjust 139 Var Form Type 140 Vert Forms 79 Vert Forms LG Emulation 271 VFU Select 223 VFU Select P Series XQ Emulation 230 VGL S
223. nt perform all the procedures in this chapter in the order presented Power Requirements IMPORTANT The printer must be connected to a power outlet that supplies AC 100V to 240V 10 at 50 to 60 Hz The printer automatically senses and adjusts itself to conform to the correct voltage range Primary circuit protection is provided by the power switch which is also a circuit breaker Consult an electrician if printer operation affects local electrical lines Printer power should be supplied from a separate AC circuit protected at 10 amperes for 100 120 volts or 5 amperes for 200 240 volts at 50 or 60 Hertz 21 Select A Site Chapter 2 Select A Site 22 Select a printer site that meets all of the following requirements Permits complete opening of the printer cover and doors For cabinet models allows at least three feet of clearance behind the printer This permits air to circulate freely around the printer and provides access to the paper stacking area Has a standard power outlet that supplies 88 135 Volts AC or 178 270 Volts AC power at 47 to 63 Hz Is relatively dust free Has a temperature range of 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F and a relative humidity from 15 to 90 non condensing Is located within the maximum allowable cable length to the host computer This distance depends on the type of interface you plan to use as shown in Table 2 Table 2 Maximum Interface Connection Cable Lengt
224. nter indicates a printer fault 297 Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface The 1284 supports three operating modes which are determined by negotiation between the printer and the host Compatibility Mode This mode provides compatibility with Centronics like host I O see Table 10 Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8 bit bytes over the data lines Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide bidirectional communication Nibble Mode Eight bits equals one byte When a byte of data is sent to the printer the eight bits are sent over eight data lines Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines To bypass this the 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines Half a byte equals one nibble Two sequential four bit nibbles are sent over the lines Data is transferred from printer to host in four bit nibbles over the status lines and the host controls the transmission Byte Mode The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines one bit per line If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host the host will take control of the data transfer 298 Signals Signals Table 10 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on the 1284 interface Descriptions of the signals follow Table 10 1284 Signals Type of Mode
225. nter model 4234 default IBM 4234 67XX Decision Data 67XX 64XX IBM 6400 series 4224 IBM 4224 Early Print Comp Complete This parameter chooses when to send a Print Comp to the controller Off default Print Comp is sent if page is printed completely On Print Comp is sent immediately The next page will be created This improves the print performance when starting the next page NOTE When Early Print Comp is enabled and an error occurs you may lose data IPDS Emulation Graphics Scaling This parameter chooses the scaling factor for graphics when the Mappin Control option of the IPDS Write Graphics Control command is SCALE TO FIT e Rounded default Calculations are rounded up in the desired output resolution e Exact Graphics will be scaled as accurately as possible Graphic CharSize This parameter will emulate the graphic character size of the selected printer model e 4234 default IBM 4234 e 67XX Decision Data 67XX 2 5 Checksum This parameter defines the printer checksum calculation method for Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes e Standard 1 3 default The odd numbers will be multiplied by 3 and the even numbers by 1 for calculation of the checksum e Special 4 9 The odd numbers will be multiplied by 4 and the even numbers by 9 for calculation of the checksum NOTE Odd refers to the 1st 3rd 5th character in the barcode while even refers to the 2nd 4th 6th
226. nter parameter setting such as line spacing or forms length either by pressing keys on the control panel or by sending emulation control codes in the data stream from a host attached to the printer The control panel allows you to configure the printer s resident set of configuration menus An example procedure for using the control panel to change parameter settings begins on page 57 When control codes are sent from a host attached to the printer they override control panel settings For example if you set the line spacing to 6 Ipi with the control panel and application software later changes this to 8 Ipi with a control code the control code overrides the control panel setting Saving Parameter Settings The parameter settings that you have changed using the menus and control codes will be permanently stored in the printer s memory Changes made to the Factory Default configuration menu items will always be written to the first available Config where equals the next available unassigned configuration number and can be made with or without the Protect Config option disabled You may also save your new configurations using the PTX_SETUP command host control code See your LinePrinter Plus Programmer s Reference Manual for details Default And Custom Configurations Default And Custom Configurations A configuration consists of a group of parameter settings such as line spacing forms length etc Your printer provides
227. o 614 Shuttle Only Dice Five Phase Printer Paperout Adj DRAM Flash Avail Avail 20722480 4973757 Bytes Bytes Test Width Set this parameter to run the self tests at full width or 80 columns 289 Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 290 Printer Tests These tests are used to check the print quality and operation of the printer NOTE Your authorized service representative will typically run the tests They are described in more detail in the Maintenance Manual e Shift Recycle A sliding alphanumeric pattern which identifies missing or malformed characters improper vertical alignment or vertical compression All E s A pattern of all uppercase E s which identifies missing characters misplaced dots smeared characters improper phasing problems or light dark character variations e E s TOF A pattern of all E s followed by a form feed to the next page top of form which identifies paper motion or feeding problems e All H s A pattern of all uppercase H s used to detect missing characters misplaced dots smeared characters or improper phasing e All Underlines An underline pattern useful for identifying hammer bank misalignment e All Black A condition where all dot positions are printed creating a solid black band e Shuttle Slow Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon motion at low speed e Shuttle Fast Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon motion
228. o choose a compressed character 60 shorter for 17 or 20 cpi instead of the normal height character e Disable default The PGL does not use compressed 17 or 20 cpi font e Light Font Uses the standard compressed 17 or 20 cpi font e Dark Font Uses a darker compressed 17 or 20 cpi font compatible with the IGP X00 printers Ignore Char Ignore Mode This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under the Select Character menu e Disable default The PGL does not ignore any characters e Enable The PGL ignores the characters specified in the Select Character menu Select Char Instructs the PGL which decimal character 0 255 to ignore from the host 140 IGP PGL Submenu Compatbl Mode This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP with respect to certain commands All new users with new applications should select the None option Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual When replacing an older product operating with an existing application especially those using the PMODE and SMODE commands you may need to select a compatibility mode In this case select the printer model number option that most closely matches the printer being replaced The Compatibility Mode options include e None default e MVP e L150 e P3000 e P6000 e P9000 Expanded Font This option defines the type of expanded characters the
229. o produce the same output on a Line Matrix printer with the Coax Twinax CTHI capability as done using a non CT printer with the third party converter interfaces The SPC replaces the third party add on protocol converters attached to older line matrix printers The SPC gives the printer the operational ability to connect to any PC or network system supporting parallel or serial interfaces and to three different IBM host systems System 3x AS 400 and 3270 Mainframes The SPC will support the following third party models for Twinax MODE 219 MODE IBM and MODE PROLINE The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax 3287 The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your line matrix printer Centronics Dataproducts Serial Coax and Twinax Also supported are Epson Proprinter P Series Serial Matrix IGP VGL and IGP PGL emulations The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through Coax Twinax and Parallel and Serial interfaces This is accomplished through the Auto Switching feature see page 86 Because of hardware restrictions Coax and Twinax cannot be selected together For more information consult the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for the Simple Protocol Converter Option Coax Emulation Coax Emulation CTHI from page 167 Factory Default 1 Valid only when the printer emulates 3287
230. ocessing Disable Disable Disable Disable Top of Line NLQ Enable Enable Forward Slant Enable Bottom of Line OCR A Backward Slant OCR B High Speed NLQ Sans Serif High Speed 100 NLQ 200 DP 200 High Speed 64 BARCODE 145 BARCODE 160 210 LinePrinter Plus Emulation Factory Default 1These menus do not appear if the Coax or Twinax host interface is selected See page 85 2 This value is 132 if the Coax or Twinax host Page Format g interface is selected from page 209 Form Form Margins Perforation Length Width Skip Abs Length IN Abs Width IN Left Margin Disable 11 0 inches 13 6 inches 0 columns 1 2 Inch 0 1 24 0 1 13 6 0 369 2 3 Inch Abs Length MM Abs Width MM Right Margin 5 6 Inch 279 4 mm 345 4 mm 0 columns 1 inch 0 1 609 6 0 1 345 4 0 369 Funct of Lines Function of CPI Bottom Margin 66 lines 136 characters 0 lines 1 192 1 272 0 451 211 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il EMULATION from page 166 LinePrinter NOTE When the printer is set to SPC Twx Params or SPC Coax Params no LP menu items will take effect on the same offline The LP Emulation resets when the printer is taken offline Factory Default Printer Protocol Print Char Set CPI LPI Font Page Select Attributes Format see
231. odes can use hex 00 through hex 7F Options include the following e ESC hex 1B e SOH hex 01 e ETX hex 03 e CIRCUMFLEX hex 5E also called caret e TILDE hex 7E NOTE SOH ETX and ESC are non printables The characters and are printable however do not use them as printables in the host data stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will occur VFU Select Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting e EVFU default Enables the VFU and selects P Series compatible Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU e DVFU Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit DVFU e CVFU Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit CVFU e Disable Disables all VFU processing Alt Set 80 9F Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex 9F as control codes or as printable characters The options include e Control Code default e Printable 223 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il 224 Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the P Series Character Set Menu on page 225 To use one of these sets choose the desired group heading such as European Sets and press ENTER Then choose the desired set within that group such as Roman 8 and press ENTER Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your se
232. old from the host or the CANCEL key is pressed Twinax Params PTX Transparent Lead in Chars You can enable additional features that are not available in standard Twinax emulations To access these features send text commands in the data stream The commands must have a start and end code Three sets each containing a start and end code are available e Set1 start code lt stop code gt e Set 2 start code stop code e Set3 start code _ stop code _ e User Defined Usr Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 5F e Start Code 2 5F e Stop Code 5B Alt Set 80 9F e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code 183 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 184 Graphic Chek Err Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA Set Graphic Error Action command For more information about the SGEA command refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual e Enable default The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors the printer will stop when a graphic error is detected e Disabl
233. om Length Arabic CP 864 Spanish Left Margin Funct of lines Function of CPI Nordic CP 865 Danish Norw A 0 columns 66 lines 136 Characters Latin 2 8859 2 Danish Norw B 0 369 1 1 92 1 272 Latin 3 8859 3 Danish Norw C Right Margin Latin 4 8859 4 Danish Norw D 0 columns Lat Ara 8859 6 Swed Finnish A 0 369 Lat Gre 8859 7 Swed Finnish B Top Margin Lat Heb 8859 8 Swed Finnish C 0 lines Latin 5 8859 9 Swed Finnish D 0 451 Turkish2 CP867 Swiss Bottom Margin Pol Maz CP8576 USA 0 lines Turkish CP 8577 Yugoslavian 0 451 Greek CP 8573 United Kingdm A Italian CP 23 Turkish Spanish CP 24 Greek DEC Mult Roman 8 249 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation CPI LPI Select Defines the default values for the horizontal and vertical character spacing The number of characters per inch can range from 10 0 through 17 1 The number of lines per inch can range from 3 0 through 8 0 Font Attributes Typeface Choose a typeface from the available options Prop Spacing Proportional Spacing Each printed character is contained inside a character cell The width of the character cell includes the character and the space around the character e Disable Each character cell is printed with the same width Each column in the printed text will line up This example is printed with proportional spacing disabled e Enable The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character For example i takes less space to
234. on menu 167 Simple Prot Conv 168 Standard 167 Code Page Subset IPDS Emulation 262 COIL HOT message 325 Column 132 Wrap 203 Compatbl Mode 141 Compatibility Mode IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 298 Compatibility Op 175 Auto Skip At End 177 194 CR at MPP 1 175 192 CR EM and NL 3287 only 177 194 FF After Job 177 194 FF Validity 176 193 Last Char FF 176 193 NL At MPP 1 175 192 Null Suppression 176 193 Position Aft FF 4234 only 176 192 Compatibility Op 3270 Params menu 192 Compliance Energy Star 349 Component locations printer 26 Compressed CPI 140 Compressed Print P Series XQ Emulation 230 376 Config Print PCL II Emulation 268 CONFIG CONTROL menu 82 Delete Config 83 Load Config 82 Name Configs 84 Power Up Config 83 Print Config 83 Protect Configs 83 Reset Cfg Names 84 Save Config 83 Configuration Auto Save 60 Configurations custom 55 default 55 overview 53 saving 61 Control Code 06 221 P Series XQ Emulation 228 Serial Matrix Emulation 232 Control Control Code 08 221 Control panel 28 Control panel keys CANCEL 30 CLEAR 29 ENTER 31 JOB SELECT 31 ON LINE 29 PAPER ADVANCE 29 PREV NEXT 32 PREV or NEXT 32 PRT CONFIG 30 SET TOF 30 UP DOWN 31 UP or DOWN 31 VIEW EJECT key 29 Conventions manual 18 CPI LPI Select 213 ANSI Emulation menu 250 CR at MPP 1 175 192 CR Edit 134 CR EM
235. onics IGP VGL IGP PGL SFCC Char Logical Not Caret User Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 2 Stop Code EVFU Enable Disable SPC Char Set Multinational Austrian German Belgian Canadian French Danish Norweg French Spanish English US 0500 Internat 5 0037 English US 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0290 Japan Kata 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK SFCC Char Logical Not Caret User Defined User Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 1 Stop Code 0500 Internat 5 0037 English US 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0290 Japan Kata 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK SFCC Char Logical Not Caret User Defined User Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 1 Stop Code NOTE To access the SPC Twinax Params menu be sure to select the Twinax option in the Host Interface menu SPC Twx Params Device Address Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6 The host directs data and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique device address After the address has been changed a POR status is sent to the host SPC Type Allows you to select a specific type of Simple Protocol Convertor SPC Twinax emulation MODE 219 for Model 219 protocol conver
236. or all emulations except IPDS See IPDS Emulation on page 257 to set the bar code quality for IPDS e Dark default Bar code resolution is set at 120 x 72 e Draft Bar code resolution is set at 60 x 72 Tear Bar Dist Distance Allows fine and course adjustment of the tear bar position For a pedestal model printer using the top paper exit the default 7 46 inches is used You can specify 4 5 to 10 5 inches in 01 inch increments to accommodate variations in cover and form design Unidirectional The Unidirectional feature affects both print quality and printing speed By setting this feature you can configure the printer to print in both directions of the shuttle sweep bidirectional or to print in one direction only unidirectional e Disable default The printer will print all data in both directions of the shuttle sweep bidirectional printing This choice produces higher printing speed e Enable The printer will print all data in only one direction of the shuttle sweep unidirectional printing Although enabling this feature reduces print speed it enhances the vertical alignment of dots and produces cleaner sharper barcodes and text 279 Chapter 4 PRINTER CONTROL 280 Display Language This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD English German French Italian Spanish or Portuguese The factory default is English Accented Char Selects whether the accented characte
237. orks both online and offline e f online with data in the printer buffer the data will print and then the paper will move to the next top of form e In the fault state PAPER ADVANCE will advance the paper The first press moves to the top of the next available form All subsequent presses advances one forms length as defined by the current active forms length VIEW EJECT When the printer is online or offline pressing this key executes the view or eject function depending on whether the printer is a cabinet or a pedestal or zero tear pedestal If online with data in the printer buffer the data prints and the key functions as described below If in a fault state this key will be ignored e View Function for cabinet models pressing the VIEW EJECT key moves the last data printed to the tractor area for viewing While in the view state the message Printer in View displays pressing the UP or DOWN arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1 72 inch increments This is done to align the image within a pre printed form for example Refer to the UP and DOWN key functions for additional details on the 29 30 Chapter 3 The Control Panel microstep feature Pressing VIEW EJECT a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print position Eject Function for pedestal models when the VIEW EJECT key is pressed the bottom of the last printed form will move to the tear bar position The message READY TO TEAR EJECT
238. ory and several statistics on File System usage Do not turn the printer off until it has completely rebooted and is either back online or offline Set Sharing This option allows character sets to be shared between the active LP protocol and the active IGP emulation If CT is installed and active choosing a character set in the CT activates that character set in the active IGP and LP protocols These changes will not be visible on the front panel If Set Sharing is not selected only the LP will share the CT s character set Switching host interfaces from CT to Centronics when the Set Sharing is enabled will cause the LP character set to be activated to the same character set of the active IGP if possible 285 Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER 286 In a non CT system changing characters sets in LP causes the active IGP to change to the same character set if the selected set exists in IGP If the active IGP has no access to the selected set no changes are made Selecting a new character set in the active IGP causes the LP to change to the same character set if the selected character set exists in the active LP protocol Not all sets are shared between emulations in the Standard group of character sets As a result selecting a set in the Standard group of LP or IGP emulation may or may not cause the other emulation to have the same set NOTE The front panel option Set Sharing has no effect on the LP and CT LP builds The opt
239. osition Knob j Paper Thickness Indicator Platen Lever Platen Stop Knob Figure 15 Adjusting the Platen Lever 29 Turn the Auto Platen Stop Knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the paper thickness The A B C scale corresponds approximately to 1 3 and 6 part paper thickness Adjust until you have the desired print quality NOTE The platen stop allows you to set an optimum and consistent thickness that is not affected when opening and closing the platen lever 30 Lower the platen lever until it stops 31 Press ON LINE CLEAR to clear any fault messages such as LOAD PAPER from the LCD 32 Press SET TOF The top of form you have set moves down to the print position If there is data in the buffer the paper moves forward to the last print position on the next page 33 Press ON LINE CLEAR and close the printer cover 44 Unload Paper Unload Paper 1 Press ON LINE CLEAR to place the printer in offline mode and open the printer cover 2 For cabinet models open the cabinet rear door For models with the power stacker installed press the STACKER UP key on the rear control panel Paper Perforation ZplunomG Figure 16 Unloading the Paper from the Printer 3 Tear off the paper at the perforation 4 Allow the paper to fall to the back of the printer and into the paper stacking area 5 For pedestal models remove the stacked paper from the paper tray 45 Chapter
240. ou entered will now represent this configuration on the printer s front panel To exit this menu without saving press any key other than the ENTER key The configuration name will revert to the last saved value Reset Cfg Names You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the configuration number HOST INTERFACE HOST INTERFACE HOST INTERFACE from page 70 Factory Defaultt Auto Twinax Coax IEEE 1284 Centronics Dataproducts Switching see page 86 Available with Available with see page 88 see page 91 see page 94 CT Option CT Option Serial E Net Ethernet Adapter see page 98 IMPORTANT see page 106 see page 107 The Host Interface Menu enables you to select and configure one of many types of interfaces between the printer and your host computer The currently selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control panel message display Each interface has its own submenu with a set of interface parameters which can be configured When switching between Twinax Coax or Auto Switching the printer will load the power up configuration and the new interface parameters Any settings made and not saved before selecting these interfaces will be lost 85 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Auto Switching Submenu Auto Switching from page 85 Parall
241. page 209 Select CPI see next page 10 0 CPI 12 0 CPI 13 3 CPI 15 0 CPI 17 1 CPI 20 0 CPI Select LPI 6 0 LPI 8 0 LPI 10 3 LPI Reset Cmd CFG Ld Disable Power up config Current config Factory config 212 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL II Factory Default Font Attributes from page 212 Typeface Prop Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Spacing Zero Data Processing _Disable Disable Disable Disable NLQ Enable Enable Forward Slant Enable OCR A Backward Slant OCR B High Speed NLQ Sans Serif Printer Protocol Select the LinePrinter protocol you wish to use Refer to the LinePrinter Plus Programmer s Reference Manual for more information CPI LPI Select This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch cpi and lines per inch lpi values Host Command This parameter allows you to block certain host commands from being acknowledged by the printer e Enable default All host commands are acknowledged by the printer e ignore All All host commands are ignored by the printer e Ignore CPI All CPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer 213 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il 214 Ignore LPI All LP commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer Ignore Unidir All Unidirectional commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer Font Attributes Typeface Data
242. piar la impresora Staccare la fonte di energia prima della pulitura della stampante Exterior Cleaning Clean the outside of the cabinet with a soft lint free cloth and mild detergent soap Dishwashing liquid works well Do not use abrasive powders or chemical solvents Clean the windows with plain water or mild window cleaner Always apply the cleaning solution to the cloth never pour cleaning solution directly onto the printer 311 Chapter 7 Cleaning Requirements Interior Cleaning Over time particles of paper and ink accumulate inside the printers This is normal Paper dust and ink build up must be periodically removed to avoid degraded print quality Most paper dust accumulates around the ends of the platen and ribbon path Ribbon Ribbon Spool Date Code Label Hammer Bank Cover and Ribbon Mask rae Vertical A 1 Position Knob YZ SAN Blue A Lock 2 j es Platen Lever Barcode Sensor Platen Stop Ribbon Guide 2 Figure 26 Interior Printer Components 312 CAUTION CAUTION Interior Cleaning To clean the interior of the printer perform the following steps 1 ao fF oO DN D Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord Open the printer cover Fully raise the platen lever Unload the paper Unlatch the ribbon and ribbon spool and carefully lift them off the hubs Lift the ribbon out of the ribbon path Brush the paper dust and ribbon lint off the tractors
243. pson FX Character Set Menu with PCL Il Factory Default Character Set from page 241 Epson Set ASCII USA French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am French Canadian Latin Am Il OCR A OCR B Latin 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Cyrillic 866 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859 15 Polish POL1 Multinational ASCII USA EBCDIC DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 PC851 LtGk 12G Greek 7 12N Greek 8 8G Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew DEC IBM PC 246 Epson FX Emulation Epson FX Character Set Menu with LG Character Set from page 241 Epson Set ASCII USA French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am French Canadian Latin Am II OCR A OCR B Code Page 250 Code Page 220 Code Page 852 Code Page 855 Code Page 857 Code Page 862 Code Page 866 Lithuanian 1 Lithuanian 2 Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew Dec Latin 9 8859 15 CP 858 Euro IBM PC Factory Default 247 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation ANSI Emulation EMULATION from page 166 Factory Default 44 48XX ANSI CPI LPI Font Page Define CR Auto LF De
244. puter If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a carriage return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line feeds to the printer e CR CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Disable default Discards any data past the forms width e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width causing the excess text to print on the next line Overstrike This option enables you to print bold characters e Enable disable Turns on bold print When enabled overstrike printing slows down the printer e Disable Turns off bold print Define LF Code e LF CR LF default Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command The next print position is print position 1 of the next line e LF LF Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be the current print position of the next line P Series Emulation P Series SFCC This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the Special Function Control Code SFCC command delimiter P Series c
245. r contact your authorized SDRAM DIMM service representative may not be properly installed B50 ERROR No SDRAM DIMM is Cycle power to see if the SDRAM LOGIC not compatible with message clears if not COMB BANKS the computer contact your authorized SDRAM DIMM service representative may not be properly installed B50 STATUS XX No Emulation software No action is required CLEAR FLASH sucessfully loaded in RAM Old program being deleted from flash memory B51 ERROR SDA No Problem with 12C Contact your authorized LINE STUCK LOW bus Either service representative SDRAM or PCI card shorting out the bus B51 STATUS XX No Status message No action is required PROGRAMMING file sucessfully loaded and is being saved in flash memory B55 STATUS SEND No EC program No action is required PROGRAM TO EC downloaded and being programed in EC 323 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Cae Explanation Solution BARCODE Yes Barcode detected If barcode appears DAMAGED but not fully damaged reverse ribbon Reverse Spools decoded spools If barcode label is present and undamaged clean sensor lens using damp cloth or swab Check that platen gap may be too tight constricting ribbon motion Loosen gap if needed BARCODE Yes No barcode seen If label is missing install MISSING on the ribbon new ribbon If barcode Ins
246. r else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport Dataproducts Standard Submenu PI Ignored Data Factory Default Data Bit 8 Resp Latch Data Prime Signal Polarity Polarity On Enable Enable Standard Standard Middle Disable Disable Disable Inverted Inverted Trailing Enable Leading TOF Action Buffer Size Auto Trickle inK Trickle Time Reset 16 Disable 1 4 sec Do Nothing 1 16 Enable 1 2 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec 94 Off Dataproducts Standard Submenu Data Bit 8 e Enable default Allows access to the extended ASCII character set e Disable The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a zero regardless of its actual setting PI Ignored The PI Paper Instruction signal is used to control vertical paper motion e Enable default Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as DVFU commands when the PI signal is true e Disable Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control codes Data Polarity The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your host computer Standard default Does not expect the host computer to invert the data Inverted Expects the data received on the data lines from the host computer to be inverted Ones become zeros
247. r of characters is 40 e Kerberos Password 31 40 Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 Reset Kerberos Password Resets the Kerberos password to an empty string KDC Port Number KDC Key Distribution Center port number is the 2 byte UDP TCP port used for Kerberos Communication The range is 0 65535 and the factory default is 88 Clock Skew Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds or minutes that Kerberos authentication will tolerate before assuming that a Kerberos message is valid The range for Seconds is 60 900 and the default is 300 The range for Minutes is 1 15 and the default is 5 Ticket Lifetime Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds Minutes Hours or Days that a ticket obtained from the Kerberos server is valid before getting a new one e Seconds The range is 300 259200 and the default is 43200 e Minutes The range is 5 4320 and the default is 720 e Hours The range is 1 72 and the default is 12 e Days The range is 1 3 and the default is 1 e Ticket Lifetime Sec The ticket lifetime unit in seconds The default is 43200 WLAN LEAP Renew Lifetime Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds Minutes Hours or Days before warning that a new Kerberos password is needed e Seconds The range is 0 604800 and the default is O e Minutes The range is 0 10080 and the default is 0 e Hours The range is 1 168
248. r will reset to the power up configuration and reset its internal state 4 ON LINE IPDS Emulation only In offline mode press 4 ON LINE If there is data in the printer buffer the printer will be placed in online mode print one page and return to the offline mode This action can be repeated until the end of a print job Only one page prints each time you press 4 ON LINE If there is no data in the printer buffer the printer is placed in online mode In the fault state a ON LINE does not work 4 PAPER ADVANCE IPDS Emulation only In offline mode press 4 PAPER ADVANCE The printer will perform a reverse linefeed If you hold down the 4 PAPER ADVANCE keys for longer than 1 2 second the printer moves to the previous top of form position If there is data in the printer buffer the data does not print In the fault state 4 PAPER ADVANCE does not work Control Panel Keys 4 VIEW IPDS Emulation only In offline mode press 4 VIEW If there is data in the IPDS printer buffer the printer will be placed in online mode print one line and return to offline mode This action can be repeated until the end of the job This function prints only one line of text If the data is not text only 1 6 inch prints If there is no data in the printer buffer the printer is placed in online mode for one second and then returns to offline mode In the fault state VIEW does not work Ribbon Life Indicator Indi
249. rameter selects a character set for the ANSI emulation Note that when 0876 OCR A or 0877 OCR B is selected as the print language the Font Attributes Typeface parameter is changed to OCR A or OCR B respectively Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual Printer Select e ON DC1 OFF DC3 default Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received e Disable Ignores the DC1 and DC3 control codes ESC c Sequence e Enable default An ESC c code received from the host resets the printer parameters to the factory defaults e Disable An ESC c code received from the host is ignored Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command ESC or ESC k in addition to resetting printer variables the selected configuration will be loaded e Disable default The active emulation parameters are loaded when the reset command is executed e Power Up Config The power up configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Current Config The currently selected configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Factory Config The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed ANSI Emulation Received CR e Observe default A CR code received from the host is handled as a carriage return e Ignore A CR code received from the host is ignored Re
250. rent line before an IGP command e Disable The printer will print all data on the current line before an IGP command Forms Handling This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways e Disable the default No effect e Auto Eject Automatically ejects a page at the end of the job to spill out the last page e Auto TOF Automatically does a form feed FF at the end of each form to the next top of form 135 Chapter 4 IGP PGL Emulation Barcode Options from page 129 Power On IGP PGL You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer is powered on Enable default The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on The PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode Disable The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on The PGL feature is initialized to the Quiet mode Ext Execute Copy Disable default Dynamic data and overlay data are not allowed if the optional Form Count parameter number of forms to print is specified as part of the Execute command This setting is IGP 100 compatible Enable Only dynamic data is allowed within a form in which the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command In this case the exact same form with identical dynamic data etc is printed for the Form Count However incremental data is not incremented since the page that is printing is exactly the same Also each form is printed ona separ
251. ressed to clear the jam fault Clear paper jam and reload paper 33 PLATEN OPEN TIMEOUT Yes Platen lever has been open for at least one minute Close platen lever 34 RIBBON STALL TIMEOUT Yes In the CT emulation with a coax interface the ribbon has not moved for 10 minutes after CLEAR was pressed to clear the ribbon drive fault Reload the ribbon 48V PWR FAIL No Internal power failure Contact your authorized service representative A TO D OVERUN No Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your authorized service representative ACCESS NULL PTR 318 No Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your authorized service representative Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution ACTIVATE LOST No Printer detects The printer reports the twinax protocol error communication errors B10 ERROR NO No SDRAM DIMM Cycle power to see if the DRAM DETECTED may not be message clears if not properly installed contact your authorized service representative B11 ERROR RAM No RAM test failure Cycle power to see if the TEST FAILED SDRAM DIMM message clears if not may not be contact your authorized properly installed service representative B12 ERROR No Program not Cycle power to see if the PROGRAM downloaded to the mes
252. rial Interfaces 304 NOTE The RS 232 and RS 422 serial interface circuit characteristics are compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications EIA 232 E and EIA 422 B The RS 232 and RS 422 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit serial devices that are compatible with an RS 232 controller The input serial data transfer rate in baud is selectable from the printer s control panel Baud rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 baud rates are available NOTE If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200 you may need to use RS 422 to prevent data loss The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 50 feet 15 meters for RS 232 or 4000 feet 1220 meters for RS 422 A copper conductor twisted pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of 16 pF foot 52 5 pF meter terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be used for the RS 422 RS 232 RS 232 Table 12 Standard 500 1000 1500 Ipm Models RS 232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data RXD 3 Transmit Status amp Control 2 Chassis Ground 1 Data TXD Clear To Send CTS 5 Request To Send RTS 4 Signal Ground 7 Data Set Ready DSR 6 Data Terminal Ready DTR 20 Data Carrier Detect DCD 8 Table 13 RS 232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assig
253. rial MAC Address 2 MAC Address 2 IEEE 1284 DHCP 2 DHCP 2 Coax Twinax Ethernet WLAN Active IGP PGL SFCC 1 VGL SFCC gt Address EMUL 4 IP Address 2 IGP PGL 7E 5E Subnet Mask 3 IGP VGL 4 TPE Gateway Address 3 MAC Address 3 DHCP 8 i Printer Form Form Select CPI Protocol Length Width P Series Funct of Lines Funct of CPI 10 0 CPI P Series XQ 66 lines 132 characters 12 0 CPI Serial Matrix 1 192 lines 1 272 characters 13 3 CPI Proprinter XL 15 0 CPI Epson FX 17 1 CPI 20 0 CPI 73 74 QUICK SETUP continued Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Factory Default 1 If installed 2 If Enet is selected 3 If Wireless is selected 6 If LP is selected 7 If ANSI is installed 8 If LG is installed 9 If PCL II is installed 4 If VGL is enabled 5 If VGL is selected Bottom Margin Form Vert Width Forms 8 Horiz Select CPI P Series Margins 7 Form SFCC Length 7 6 0 LPI 1 Left Margin Funct of Lines 8 0 LPI 00 7F Right Margin 66 Lines 10 3 LPI Top Margin 1 192 Page Length Forms 8 Funct of CPI 136 Characters 1 272 Bot Frm 66 6 0 198 Top Mrg 0 6 0 198 Left Mrg 0 00 0 198 Rep Inches Page Lines Page Top Mrg 0 6 0 198 Max Line Width Ribbon End Point Save Config Power Up Config
254. ries Association Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc QMS is a registered trademark and Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro Systems Inc TUV is a registered certification mark of TUV Rheinland of North America Inc UL is a registered certification mark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency As an ENERGY STAR Partner Printronix has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency Trademark Acknowledgements Table of Contents Introduction 2 cisccssetsec lend tectenedencceumetes atte 13 Printer Overview cccccceecesceeeeeneeeceeeeeenaeeeseaeeseeaeeteeaeeseaees 13 The P7000 Series PSA3 Printer 13 Integrated Print Management System 15 Graphics Enhancements eeren 17 Taking Care Of Your Printer 17 Conventions In This Manual 0 cccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 18 Warnings And Special Information s s s 18 Related DOCUMENTS ccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeenenaaes 19 Printronix Customer Support Center sses 20 Setting Up The Printer 000000e 21 Before You Bogi risaie a A A Rei 21 Power Requirements ccccescceeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 21 Select A Site o
255. roduct is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevent provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non recommended modification of the product including the fitting of non Printronix option cards This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology Equipment according to European standard EN 55022 The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors Industry Canada Compliance Statement This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A conform a la norme NMB 003 du Canada 361 Appendix C Communication Statements Statement of CISPR 22 Edition 2 Compliance Attention This is a Class A Product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Japanese VCCI Class A TORE
256. rovision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable This Agreement shall be governed by California law provisions except to the extent applicable law if any provides otherwise excluding its conflict of law provisions 8 Red Hat Statement with regards to eCos Software Part of the software embedded in this product is eCos Embedded Configurable Operating System a trademark of Red Hat Portions created by Red Hat are Copyright C 1998 1999 2000 Red Hat Inc http Awww redhat com All Rights Reserved THE SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART PROVIDED BY RED HAT AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 369 Appendix C Software License Agreement 370 Index Numerics 06 HOST REQUEST message 317 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT message 317 15
257. rresponds approximately to 1 3 and 6 part paper thickness NOTE If you are using the same thickness of paper there is no need to readjust 11 Lower the platen lever until it stops 12 Press ON LINE CLEAR to remove the LOAD PAPER fault message from the display 37 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures 13 Press PAPER ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide Feed sufficient paper to ensure the paper stacks correctly 14 Close the printer top cover Close the cabinet front door 15 Press ON LINE CLEAR to place the printer in online mode and resume printing P lot Paper Slot apar alo el Metal Paper Guide P7220 Only L rydid Cabinet Models Pedestal Models Figure 9 Paper Slots on the Printers NOTE Perform steps 16 to 33 only if you are unable to load the new paper over the existing paper 16 Open both tractor doors 17 Remove the old paper from the tractors Allow the paper to fall into the paper supply area 18 Feed the new paper up through the paper slot Hold the paper to prevent it from slipping down through the paper slot 38 Reload Paper Left Tractor Door Paper Left Tractor Lock Figure 10 Loading Paper on the Left Tractor 19 Pull the paper above and behind the ribbon mask See Figure 4 on page 26 for the ribbon mask location 20 Load the paper on the left tractor
258. rs are standard or tall See Figure 23 for an example Selecting tall will slow print speed and may cause the printer to back up during printing Standard Tall Figure 23 Accented Characters ADVANCED USER ADVANCED USER ADVANCED USER from page 70 Factory Default Mf you have the CT option Enable is the default value 2 If installed 3 Not available in PCL II 4 Not available in LG or PCL II PTX Setup Hex Dump Power up Downloaded PMD Fault Power Option Mode State Fonts 4 Stacker Setup Parse Disable Online Enable Enable Disable Enable Offline Disable Disable Enable Ignore Setup SFCC 21h 1 FF hex Char Ld Char at Set Ld Set at Operations Pwrup Operations PwrUp Delete frm Flash Disable Delete frm Flash Disable Load from Flash Enable Load from Flash Enable Save to Flash Save to Flash Delete from RAM Delete from RAM Auto Auto File Set Shuttle Slow Paper Elevator Locking System Sharing Timeout Slew Enable Disable Overwrite Files Disable 5 Seconds Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable 1 60 Seconds Enable Disable View File List Delete Files Flash Avail Optimize amp Reboot Print File List Alarm Power Pwr Save Cancel Saver Time Control Key On 15 minu
259. rsetng Mer 10 0 136 12 0 163 13 3 181 15 0 204 16 7 297 17 1 272 ANSI Emulation Define CR Code The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a carriage return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex OA into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR CR default No extra line feeds are inserted e CR CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return Auto LF Defines the printer actions when print data is received past the form width setting e Disable default Discards any data past the form width e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the form width Define LF Code Controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code hex OA from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a line feed it inserts an additional carriage return code hex OD into the data stream This feature can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer e LF CR LF default Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed e LF LF Does not add a carriage return with a line feed 253 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation 254 Character Set This pa
260. rsion 2 Brazilian Arabic Euro Aust Germ Canadian French Greek Euro Dan Norw Danish Norw Icelandic Euro Fin Swed Finnish Swedish French Azerty Italian Japanese Eng Katakana Turkish Latin 5 Latin 2 Roece Cryllic Old Thai Hebrew Euro Italian Euro Spanish Euro UK Ireland Euro French Euro Internat Euro Icelandic 257 Chapter 4 IPDS Emulation from page 257 IPDS Emulation Factory Default lt Default Font VPA Check Hexdump Print IPDS rm Mode Fonts 258 DRAFT 10 DRAFT 12 DRAFT 13 DRAFT 15 DRAFT 17 DRAFT 18 DP 10 DP 12 DP 13 DP 15 DP 17 DP 18 NLQ 10 NLQ 12 NLQ 13 NLQ 15 NLQ 17 NLQ 18 OCRA OCRB PSM Enable Disable Disable Enable Your IPDS printer emulates the IBM 4234 twinax models 008 and 012 IPDS Twinax printers can only print IPDS data streams and nothing else Even a simple job such as a screen print is IPDS data ina twinax attachment Because the printer definition on a twinax host is either set automatically by auto configuration or manually the printer type is already known NOTE A general discussion about starting and stopping IPDS can be found in the IBM 4234 Product and Programming Reference Manual GC31 3879 Sending a non IPDS data stream to an IPDS printer and vise versa will result in a hung spool file or writer IPDS Emulation Font Size This parameter chooses the font size which wi
261. rt to empty out Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use Dataproducts Standard Submenu For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport 97 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Serial Submenu Factory Default Serial from page 85 Interface Data Baud Word Stop Parity Type Protocol Rate Length 8 Bits 1 RS 232 XON XOFF 9600 Baud 8 1 None RS 422 ETX ACK 19200 Baud 7 2 Odd ACK NAK 38400 Baud Even Series1 1 Char 57600 Baud Mark Series1 2 Char 115200 Baud Sense DTR 600 Baud 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 4800 Baud
262. rtugu 4S Greek 8 8G Roman 9 4U Latin 1 0N Hebrew 8 8H Latin 9 9N Latin 2 2N Katakana 8 8K Win3 0Lat 1 9U Latin 5 5N DEC 256 Greek Japan Postnet Latin 6 6N ELOT 928 Greek Katakana Post Baltic 19L Greek 3 ASCII OU PC8 DanNor 11U ABY Greek Math Sym 0A 0M PC8 Cd437 10U ABG Greek LineDraw 0B 0L PC850 MtLi 12U ELOT 927 Greek ISO Den Nor OD PC851 LtGk 12G Greek 437 Roman Ext OE ISO UK 1E ISO France 0F ISO German 0G Hebrew 0H Japan ASCII OK Katakana 1K Block Char 1L 264 PC852 Lat2 17U PC Turkish 9T PC Hebrew 15H PC Lat Ara 10V PC Cyrillic 3R Win3 1Lat1 19U Win3 1Lat 2 9E Win3 1Lat 5 5T Greek 8859 7 PCL II Emulation Primary Char Set You can select one of 92 pre defined character sets by ID although character sets range from 0 109 not all sets are available on the LJ500 printer or you can select pitch symbol set and typeface individually If the combination you choose matches one of the 92 predefined sets the ID submenu will reflect that selection If not the ID menu will display xx to indicate that the current character set does not match a pre defined set Set 0 is the default and its attributes are 10 cpi Data Processing typeface and Roman 8 symbol set Second Char Set Your printer can store an additional character set To toggle between them send the Shift In Decimal 15 to select the Primary character set or Shift Out Decimal 14 to select the Secondary character
263. s Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution B23 ERROR No FLASH SIMM may Cycle power to see if the DECOMPRESS not be properly message clears if not CKSUM installed contact your authorized service representative B30 STATUS N A Status message No action is required INITIALIZING informing the operator that software is being downloaded through one of the printer s I O ports using the two key download activation B35 STATUS N A Waiting for EC DC No action is required WAITING FOR EC Powerup STATUS handshake B40 ERROR No SDRAM DIMM Cycle power to see if the SDRAM EEPROM may not be message clears if not CKSUM BAD properly installed contact your authorized service representative B41 ERROR DIM No SDRAM DIMM is Cycle power to see if the MEMORY NOT not compatible with message clears if not SDRAM the computer contact your authorized SDRAM DIMM service representative may not be properly installed B42 ERROR No SDRAM DIMM is Cycle power to see if the SDRAM ROWS NOT not compatible with message clears if not ALLOWED the computer contact your authorized SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed service representative 321 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed Can Us
264. s end of life If the ribbon is not changed an alert will again be initiated once the ribbon reaches the 0 end point Refer to your PrintNet Enterprise Remote Management Software manual for details Graphics Enhancements The IGP PGL and IGP VGL emulations allow you to create and store forms generate logos bar codes expanded characters and create other graphics Alphanumeric and bar code data are added as the form is printed These emulations are available as factory installed or field installed options For more information contact your authorized service representative Taking Care Of Your Printer Your printer will produce high print quality jobs if it is well taken care of Periodic cleaning handling the printer properly and using the correct printer supplies such as ribbon and paper ensures optimum performance Chapter 7 explains how to clean the printer and printer supplies are listed in Appendix A Whenever it is necessary to service the printer remember these important maintenance concepts e Incorrect closure of the platen lever can lead to smearing degraded print quality paper jams and damage to the platen and shuttle assembly Never close the platen lever too tightly 17 Chapter 1 Conventions In This Manual Conventions In This Manual All uppercase print indicates control panel keys Example Press the CLEAR key then press the ON LINE key Quotation marks indicate messages on the Liq
265. s Software is available under the terms of the Red Hat eCos Public License v1 1 at www printronix com Printronix grants no rights whatsoever in the source code for the Printronix Software 3 No Warranty THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES THAT THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGING THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU SHOULD ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT YOU NOT RED HAT PRINTRONIX ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE NO USE OF ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER 4 Conflicting Terms You agree that this Agreement provides you no more rights with regards to warranty support indemnity or liability terms with respect to Red Hat Inc Printronix Inc or any contributor to the Embedded Software than that provided by the Red Hat eCos Public License v 1 1 or any express warranty that may be made by Printronix Inc 367 Appendix C Software License Agreement 368 5 Limitation of Liability UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY WHETHER TORT INCLU
266. s control all graphics functions dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time Graphics capabilities include boxes vertical and horizontal solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness logos and special alphanumeric print features Variable Barcodes allow the barcode for your application to print with standard or user defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations Available barcodes are Codabar Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 with Subsets A B and C and Code EAN UCC 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 Interleaved 2 of 5 MSI UPC A UPC E POSTNET PostBar Royal Mail and UPC Shipping POSTNET is available only in the horizontal direction A dark print mode is included for darker high contrast barcodes The IBARC barcode command prints barcodes in four orientations horizontal rotated 90 rotated 180 or rotated 270 degrees Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous range of character sizes up to 9 9 inches wide and tall Several compressed print sizes are available 12 13 33 15 17 65 and 20 cpi permitting up to 170 columns in an 8 5 inch printed area 20 cpi Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design Normal expanded and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise counterclockwise or printed upside down 146 IMPORTANT Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel Logos
267. sage 323 B50 XX CLEAR FLASH 323 B51 ERROR 50A LINE STUCK LOW 323 B51 XX PROGRAMMING 323 B55 STATUS SEND PROGRAM TO EC 323 Bar Code Quality PRINTER CONTROL 279 Bar Code Verification 314 BARCODE DAMAGED message 324 Barcode Darkmode ANSI Emulation menu 256 Barcode Errors 161 BARCODE MISSING message 324 Barcode Options 137 Al 00 Spaces 138 2 5 Selection 138 Optimized Ratio 137 Select SO Char 138 UPC Descenders 137 User Def Ratio 139 374 Barcode Quality IPDS Emulation 259 Barcode Size IPDS Emulation 260 Barcode Speed IPDS Emulation 260 Baud Rate Serial submenu 102 BC Check Digit ANSI Emulation menu 255 Buffer Clear Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 295 BUFFER OVERRUN message 324 Buffer Print 179 186 203 SPC Twx Params 208 Buffer Reprint 172 204 Buffer Size in K Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts Standard amp Long Lines submenu 96 Ethernet submenu 106 107 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 89 Serial submenu 104 Busy On Strobe Centronics Parallel submenu 92 Busy Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 297 Byte Mode IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 298 C Cable Verify Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 295 Cancel a print job 52 Cancel IGP DCU 173 182 CANCEL key 30 Cancel Key ADVANCED USER menu 287 Centronics Parallel submenu 91 Auto Trickle 93 Buffer Size in K 93 Busy On Strobe 92 Data Bit 8 91 Data Polari
268. sage clears if not MISSING printer contact your authorized service representative B13 ERROR NOT No Attempting to Cycle power to see if the COMPATIBLE download a program that is not intended for this printer message clears if not contact your authorized service representative 319 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct Explanation Solution B19 ERROR DC RETURNED No The boot code calls the DC the printer software that runs on the PowerPC and then the DC code should run and never return back to the boot code If the DC code returns back to the boot code then this message will be displayed Cycle power to see if the message clears if not contact your authorized service representative B20 STATUS 00 DOWNLOAD MODE No Status message informing the operator that software is being downloaded Percentage figure indicates approximate amount loaded into the printer No action is required B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET No Status message informing the operator that the printer is undergoing a system reset No action is required B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE No FLASH SIMM may not be properly installed Cycle power to see if the message clears if not contact your authorized service representative 320 Fault Message
269. set Page Length Rep e Inches Page default All page length calculations are based on the inches displayed on the panel e Lines Page All changes in LPI or density will be changed accordingly The length of the page is the number of lines per inch or Ipi For example if the form in use is 82 lines at 6 Ipi the page is physically 13 67 inches Since 13 67 inches is not selectable from the Length in Inches menu change the representation to lines then set the number of lines to 82 The inches menu will display 13 6 inches although the printer internally keeps the exact form length of 13 67 inches Max Line Width Set the maximum line width at 13 2 inches the default or 13 6 inches 265 Chapter 4 PCL II Emulation 266 Face CPI Delay Allows the combination of different font densities on the same line Enable default Different font densities can be used on the same line Disable Only the same font densities are allowed on the same line Graphics Density Graphics can be printed in 60 DPI the default or 70 DPI Perforation Skip Disable default Allows printing on page perforation Enable You may set up a skip over margin For example a skip over margin of one inch creates a one inch margin at the bottom of the page Display Functions Disable default The default Control characters are not printed Enable Control characters are printed before they get executed This is a useful debuggin
270. shuttle cover assembly base casting and ribbon guides with a soft bristled non metallic brush such as a toothbrush Vacuum up the residue Vacuum carefully around the hammer bank and surrounding area to avoid damage To avoid corrosion damage use only alcohol when cleaning the printer mechanical elements Solutions used to clean mechanical elements must contain no water 8 9 10 Wipe the splined shaft with a soft cloth Check the ribbon mask and hammer bank cover for bits of torn paper or ribbon lint Remove dust and ink from the platen using a soft cloth lightly moistened with anhydrous alcohol The platen is the thick silver bar behind the hammer bank cover that rotates when the platen lever is rotated Clean the ribbon guides When cleaning the platen be very careful not to get any alcohol in the hammer bank because alcohol will cause severe damage to the hammer bank Only a trained service technician should clean the shuttle assembly 313 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems 11 Brush and vacuum the accumulated dust or residue inside the lower cabinet 12 Wipe the lower cabinet interior with a clean lint free cloth dampened not wet with water and mild detergent or window cleaning solution Dry the lower cabinet interior by wiping it down with a clean lint free cloth 13 Install the ribbon and load paper Diagnosing Problems 314 This section is designed to help you fix problems which may arise
271. sounds the indicator light flashes the display updates and printing pauses If a new ribbon is loaded the system automatically detects the change clears the condition and restarts the life at 100 If it is not convenient to change the ribbon immediately cycle the printer on and offline and it will resume printing for a few minutes This should be enough to complete the job If not repeat the same procedure indefinitely to extend printing on the same ribbon Output Darkness By default the system is configured to meet most user requirements However some applications require that the output remains darker than the nominal set point while some applications are less critical and could tolerate a lighter final image The system can easily adjust to this variability A setting under the Printer Control menu is available that allows the user to adjust the final output The range is as follows Normal Default Darker 1 through 6 Lighter 1 through 10 The ribbon life indicator always cycles between 100 and 0 but if a darker setting is selected zero will be reached more quickly 15 16 Chapter 1 Printer Overview If a lighter setting is selected the system will extend the amount of printing it takes to reach zero Ribbon Flipping In some cases the application s print pattern is narrow enough where only half of the ribbon is used when printing In these cases you can flip the ribbon and use the other half The Integra
272. st to the host when the printer is placed ONLINE Buffer Reprint This option is valid only when the printer is printing in SCS mode When the ENTER key is pressed Buffer Reprint Enabled is displayed and an Intervention Required status is sent to the host Pressing ENTER again cancels the Buffer Reprint function and Buffer Reprint Disabled is displayed SPC Null Supp Disable default Ignores nulls The print position does not move e Enable Treats nulls as blank spaces SPC Coax Params SPC Space Supp This option is only available in Coax SPC emulation and is used in LU3 DSC DSE mode only e Disable default Treats nulls and spaces normally e Enable If the entire line consists of spaces and nulls the line will be discarded NL At MPP 1 Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line e On default Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position e Off Moves to the first print position of the next print line 205 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation SPC Twx Params Factory Default CTHI from page 167 Simp Prot Conv SPC Twinax Params Device SPC Type Translation Buffer Print Address Tol Address 1 Disable Address 0 6 Enable MODE MODE MODE 219 P5000 IBM Printer Type SPC Char Set SPC Char Set 206 Impact P Series STD Centr
273. t Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line e Off Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line NL At MPP 1 Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line e On default Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position e Off Moves to the first print position of the next print line 175 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 176 Position Aft FF 4234 only Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed command is sent e On default Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the next form e Off Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first print line on the next form Last Char FF Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code encountered in the print buffer e On default Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form e Off Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form NOTE This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on If configured as a 3287 and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form regardless of the setting of this option Null Suppression e Off default Ignores nulls The print position does not move e On Treats nulls
274. t arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0 so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected Top Mrg 6 0 This option sets the top margin for the forms You must specify the top margin in lines at 6 lines per inch ranging from 0 to 198 lines 33 inches The default setting is 0 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and bottom margins do not cross each other 79 80 Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Horiz Forms e Left Mgr 0 00 default This sets the left margin for the forms You must specify the left margin in 1 10 inch increments from O to 13 1 inches The default value is 0 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other e Right Mrg 0 6 This sets the right margin for the forms You must specify the right margin in 1 10 inch increments from 0 1 to 13 2 inches The default value is 13 2 Press NEXT to increase the value PREV to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other Page Length Rep e Inches Page default Allows the user to set t
275. t matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquires in writing to Printronix Inc 14600 Myford Road P O Box 19559 Irvine CA 92623 9559 U S A 355 Appendix Notices 356 The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law PRINTRONIX PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication Printronix may make improvements and or changes in the product s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non Printronix Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Printronix product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk Any performance data contai
276. t that the functions contained in the Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free Printronix Inc reserves the right to make changes and or improvements in the Software without notice at any time 2 INNO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX INC BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS LOST DATA BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT EVEN IF PRINTRONIX INC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 3 Printronix Inc will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this Agreement 4 Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused solely by our negligence for the Software Product covered by this Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this Agreement 5 California law governs this Agreement Termination of License Agreement This License shall continue until terminated This lice
277. talian Spanish Portuguese PRINTER CONTROL Ribbon End Point This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon as being expended The life count will always be from 100 to 0 but if a darker setting is selected 0 will be reached more quickly If a lighter setting is selected the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0 The range of values are as follows e Normal default e Darker 1 through Darker 6 Lighter 1 through Lighter 10 NOTE This value can be adjusted at any time and the display will automatically adjust to show the correct percentage relative to the new end point Eject Function Enables and defines the eject function to be used When activated the function is used by holding down the VIEW EJECT key for more than one second in offline mode e Standard default Slews the paper two 11 pages when VIEW EJECT is pressed for more than one second Pressing VIEW EJECT a second time retracts two pages e Simple Tear Allows demand printing for specially designed forms which require a header of at least 2 66 inches in height This leader prevents the paper from falling out of the tractors when the demanded sheet is removed Press the VIEW EJECT key The printer slews the bottom of the last printed form to the tear position Tear the paper then press the VIEW EJECT button again The paper reverses the exact amount of paper it slewed placing the print position to th
278. tall New RBN spool Indicates label is present and missing label or undamaged clean sensor damaged or dirty lens using damp cloth or sensor swab BUFFEROVERRUN Yes Receive overrun Check printer serial port serial interface configuration setup Ensure the baud rate and data protocol match both host and printer settings CLEAR PAPER JAM Yes No paper motion Clear jam and reload paper If this message recurs contact your authorized service representative 324 Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct Explanation Solution CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH No Status message emulation software successfully loaded into printer RAM and the checksum matched The old program is now being deleted from flash memory No action is required CLOSE PLATEN Yes The platen lever is open Close the platen lever COIL HOT CTL VOLT FAIL No No One or more hammer coils are overheating Controller voltage failure Contact your authorized service representative Contact your authorized service representative DIAGNOSTIC PASSED No Status message the printer passed its memory and hardware initialization tests No action is required DO NOT POWER OFF DRVR CIR BAD No No This is a standard warning message that displays while the printer is downloading software H
279. ted Print Management System detects the flip and resets the ribbon life to 100 NOTE It is the user s responsibility to ensure the print pattern is sufficiently narrow to support flipping If not the ribbon life may falsely indicate 100 for the flipped ribbon Loading a Used Ribbon You can take ribbons off the printer and reload it at a later time The ribbon life gauge automatically updates to reflect the correct remaining capacity NOTE The ribbon must be reloaded back onto the same printer and in the same orientation as it was removed If the used ribbon is loaded onto a different printer or if it is flipped over it will incorrectly indicate the ribbon as new Ribbon Log The Integrated Printer Management System tracks all used ribbons This data allows you to monitor how many ribbons and ribbon types have been used on the printer This data is contained in the ribbon log To print the ribbon log see page 289 Graphics Enhancements Consumable Monitoring With PrintNet Enterprise The Integrated Print Management System works with PrintNet Enterprise PNE PNE allows a system administrator to remotely view the current consumable status of all printers PNE can be configured to deliver alerts on all consumable warnings When a ribbon reaches the low state PNE notifies the system administrator remotely via an automated e mail alert of the low condition This allows corrective action to be taken before the ribbon reaches it
280. ter set with a different character in the same font e Char Operations Allows you to delete a character from flash load a character from flash save a character to flash and delete a character from RAM e Ld Char at Pwrup Allows you to disable or enable loading a character at power up e Set Operations Allows you to delete a character set from flash load a character set from flash save a character set to flash and delete a character set from RAM e Ld Set at PwrUp Allows you to disable or enable loading a character set at power up NOTE This option is not available in the PCL II or LG emulation PMD Paper Motion Detection Fault e Enable default In the event of a paper jam an audible alarm beeps CLEAR PAPER JAM appears on the message display and the printer stops printing e Disable You should disable PMD only if special paper requires it Once PMD is disabled paper motion is not monitored If a paper jam occurs the printer ignores the condition and continues to print possibly causing damage to the printer 283 Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER 284 Power Stacker This parameter allows you to enable or disable the power paper stacker provided this option is installed Auto Elevator This parameter exists only on printers with the power paper stacker installed The power stacker has a sensor which detects paper movement and raises the stacker as the printed paper stack grows If the printer has bee
281. tes Enable Disable Cont Beep 1 min 240 min Disable Enable Off Instant 5 sec 30 sec 281 Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER 282 ADVANCED USER Continued SetLock _ Ribbon Ink Saver Key Action Mode Stop RBN End Disable Ignore RBN Enable End PTX Setup Option Selects the Special Function Control Code for the PTX_SETUP command and functions e Setup Parse Disables or enables the PTX_SETUP command e Setup SFCC Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character you wish to use as the SFCC for the PTX_SETUP command Valid hex values are 01 FF The default value is hex 21 which corresponds to the character Hex Dump Mode A hex code printout or hex dump translates all incoming data to hexadecimal equivalents A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the host computer together with its corresponding two digit hexadecimal code Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception problems The options include e Disable default e Enable Figure 27 on page 315 shows a hex dump sample CAUTION ADVANCED USER Power Up State e Online default The printer powers up in the online state e Offline The printer powers up in the offline state NOTE This option is not available in the PCL II or LG emulation Downloaded Fonts Allows you to download a substitution table to replace any character in the current charac
282. th Street 1 Nederland BV P O Box 19559 Changi South Industrial P O Box 163 Nieuweweg 283 Irvine CA92623 9559 Estate Singapore 486763 NI 6600 Ad Wijchen Phone 714 368 2300 Phone 65 6542 0110 The Netherlands Fax 714 368 2600 Fax 65 6543 0220 Phone 31 24 6489 489 Fax 31 24 6489499 Or visit the Printronix web site at www printronix com 178660 001A
283. the controller board RESTORING BOOT No Normal download No action is required CODE initialization message RIB INVLD CMD Yes Ribbon Invalid Cycle power Run the Command print job again If the message appears download the emulation software again If the message appears again contact your authorized service representative 338 Fault Messages Table 15 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User r Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution RIB INVLD STATE No Ribbon Invalid Contact your authorized State service representative RIBBON DRIVE No The controller Contact your authorized board does not service representative detect a ribbon drive motor RIBBON UNDER 2 Yes Message is Install a new ribbon Change RBN Soon displayed when ribbon life reaches 2 level RBN AT END POINT Yes Software has Install a new ribbon Change Ribbon determined that the ribbon life is at end point RIBBON NOT Yes The printer does Use the ribbons specified RECOGNIZED not detect correct for the printer ribbon type RIBBON STALL Yes The controller Check the ribbon path for board does not jams if necessary install detect ribbon a new ribbon movement SCS COMMAND No Printer received Contact your system ERROR undefined control administrator character SECURITY CODE No Security code of Contact your authorized VIOLATION PAL on controller service representative
284. the printers maximum speed in lines per minute lpm 05 for 500 Ipm 10 for 1000 Ipm 15 for 1500 Ipm and 20 for 2000 Ipm Refer to the following table for a complete listing of model numbers and options Table 1 The Printronix P7000 Printers Model Print Model Power Number Speed Type Stacker P7005 500 Ipm Pedestal P7010 1000 Ipm Pedestal P7015 1500 Ipm Pedestal P7205 500 Ipm Cabinet N A P7210 1000 Ipm Cabinet Option P7215 1500 Ipm Cabinet Option P7220 2000 Ipm Cabinet Option Integrated Print Management System Integrated Print Management System The P7000 has a new feature that automatically monitors and communicates ribbon life Using a specially barcoded spool the printer can automatically detect when a new or used ribbon is loaded and all ribbon properties With a sophisticated algorithm the system monitors all jobs printed and automatically updates the remaining ribbon life on the front panel display This allows the system administrator to have precise control over print quality and consumable costs The accurate presentation of available ribbon life allows for efficient planning of print jobs For example you can install a new ribbon before printing large print jobs When the ribbon life gets near the end point the printer displays a ribbon low message and flashes the indicator light Printing will continue without interruption Once the ribbon reaches 0 remaining the alarm
285. the host computer to the printer must not exceed 15 feet 5 meters 296 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals Centronics Parallel Interface Signals Data Lines 1 through 8 Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the host that specify character data plot data or a control code Data Line 8 allows access to the extended ASCII character set You may enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics submenu see page 91 Data Strobe Carries a low true 100 ns minimum pulse from the host that clocks data into the printer Acknowledge A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer Online A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for data transfer and the ON LINE key on the control panel has been activated When the printer is in online mode it may accept data from the host Paper Empty PE A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is in a paper empty or paper jam fault Busy A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive data Prime A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a warm start printer is reset to the power up configuration values Paper Instruction PI Carries a CVFU signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data line Fault A low true level from the pri
286. the paper slot see Figure 6 It may be easier to feed one corner of the new paper up through the slot first When this corner can be grasped from the top rotate the paper back to the normal position NOTE If you are using thick multi part forms and are unable to load the new paper over the existing paper go to step 16 5 Hold the paper to prevent it from slipping down and through the paper slot 35 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures New Paper Existing Paper Figure 7 Loading New Paper into the Printer 6 Pull the new paper above and behind the ribbon mask but in front of the existing paper See Figure 4 on page 26 for the ribbon mask location If necessary gently press the existing paper back 7 Align the top edge of the new paper with the top perforation of the existing paper 8 Load the new paper over the existing paper Open and load the tractors one at a time to prevent the paper from slipping NOTE Make sure that the top edge of the new paper lines up with the top horizontal perforation of the last page 36 Reload Paper Vertical Position Knob C j Paper Thickness Indicator Platen Stop Platen Lever Platen Stop Knob Figure 8 Setting the Platen Lever 9 Turn the vertical position knob to feed the paper up into the paper guide assembly removing the last printed sheet 10 Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the paper thickness The A B C scale co
287. ther the PGL or VGL emulation PGL SFCC You can specify which hex code 1 FF will be used as the Special Function Control Character SFCC The SFCC denotes that the following data is an IGP command e 7E the default e 1 FF VGL SFCC You can specify which hex code 1 FF will be used as the Special Function Control Character SFCC The SFCC denotes that the following data is an IGP command e 5E the default e 1 FF Printer Protocol Select the LinePrinter protocol you wish to use Refer to the LinePrinter Plus Programmer s Reference Manual for more information Form Length Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page You can set the form length in inches millimeters mm or as a function of the current Ipi lines per inch Form Width The form width can be specified in inches millimeters or as a function of the current cpi characters per inch The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width 77 Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP 78 Select CPI This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch cpi values Select LPI This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch lpi values P Series SFCC This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the Special Function Control Code SFCC command delimiter P Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F Options include the following e SOH hex 01 the default e ESC hex 1B e ETX hex 03
288. tinational DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 PC851 LtGk 12G Greek 7 12N Greek 8 8G Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Proprinter XL Character Set Menu with LG Character Set Factory Default from page 236 Code Page 437 Code Page 850 OCR A OCR B Code Page 210 Code Page 220 Code Page 852 Code Page 855 Code Page 857 Code Page 862 Code Page 866 Lithuanian 1 Lithuanian 2 Hebrew New Hebrew Dec Hebrew Old Latin 9 8859 15 CP 858 Euro 240 Printer Protocol from page 209 Epson FX Emulation Epson FX Emulation Factory Default Epson FX Define CR Auto LF Define LF Printer Character 20 CPI Code Code Select Set Condensed CR CR Enable LF LF Disable see page 244 Enable CR CR LF Disable LF CR LF_ Enable Disable Alt Set 80 9F Control Code Printable Define CR Code The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a carriage return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra line f
289. tion structure BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP VGL print a configuration sheet to see all of the current settings Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration menu or exit the menu completely 147 Chapter 4 IGP VGL Emulation IGP VGL Submenu EMULATION from page 70 IGP VGL Factory Default Graphics Error Ignore DB8 Options Handling Setup VGL SFCC 6 see next page Error Msgs Ignore Chars 5E 7 Enable Disable Power up 4X 8 Disable Char 1 Disable 9 Error Markers Char 2 Enable 10 Enable Char 1 amp 2 Power up F Disable Ignore Ch 1 Disable Offpage Errors 0 0 255 Enable Disable Ignore Ch 2 Power up PY Enable 0 0 255 Disable Barcode Errors Data Bit 8 Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Font Set PI Control Prt to Emulate see page 165 Printer PI Disable Enable Host PI Disable Enable Max PI 16 Enable Disable 148 Disable MVP MVP 150B L150 P3040 P6000 P9000 Graphics Options from page 148 Slash 0 Ignore Dots Disable Enable UPC Descenders Disable Enable Rot Char Size Append Rotated Disable Enable Ignore Spaces Truncate Alpha IGP VGL Submenu Factory Default Enable Disable Midline PY True Vert 1 10 Disable Enable Print Quality Absor
290. tor MODE P5000 for Printronix protocol convertor and MODE IBM for the IBM protocol convertor Printer Type Determines the SPC Twinax emulation Mode When set to Std Centronics IGP VGL or IGP PGL the Set Line Density and Set Print Density commands are translated into a Carriage Return CR and vertical format commands are ignored unless the EVFU is enabled SFCC Char Determines what character is printed when an EBCDIC Logical Not character Hex 5F is received from the host User Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 e Start Code 2 e Stop Code 207 208 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation EVFU e Enable The EVFU parameter allows vertical format control by the host in all four printer type modes e Disable Vertical format control is only allowed in IMPACT P SERIES mode SPC Char Set Allows you to select the print language character set Translation Tbl Prints out a table of the Twinax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the Twinax interface is selected Buffer Print e Disable default The printer will print normally e Enable The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values Refer to p
291. ty 92 Latch Data On 92 PI Ignored 92 Prime Signal 93 Resp Polarity 92 TOF Action 93 Trickle Time 93 Centronics Parallel Interface 296 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 297 Acknowledge 297 Busy 297 Data Lines 1 through 8 297 Data Strobe 297 Fault 297 Online 297 Paper Empty PE 297 Paper Instruction Pl 297 Prime 297 Change Case 174 Change Case 3270 Params menu 191 Changing parameter settings 54 Changing parameters example 57 Changing Ribbons 49 Char Set Select 171 181 Character Set 224 Index ANSI Emulation menu 254 ASCII 353 Epson FX Emulation 243 Proprinter XL Emulation 237 Serial Matrix Emulation 234 Characteristics environmental 348 Cleaning exterior 311 interior 312 Cleaning requirements 311 CLEAR key 29 CLEAR PAPER JAM message 324 Clear to Send CTS RS 232 306 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH message 325 Clock Skew WLAN Kerberos menu 122 CLOSE PLATEN message 325 Coax Emulation menu 169 Active Char Set 171 Buffer Print 179 Buffer Reprint 172 Cancel IGP DCU 173 Change Case 174 Char Set Select 171 Compatibility Op 175 Early Print Cmpl 172 Format Control 178 Host Override 178 Image Buf Size 175 Intervention Req 175 Max Print Width 179 PA1 171 375 Index PA2 172 Prt Partial Line 171 PTX Transparent 173 SCS Buffer Cntrl 173 Set Text Orientn 174 Translate Table 178 Translation Tbl 171 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulati
292. uid Crystal Display LCD Example Press the ON LINE key OFFLINE appears on the LCD The plus symbol represents key combinations Example Press 4 Y means press the 4 UP key and the v DOWN key at the same time Warnings And Special Information WARNING CAUTION IMPORTANT 18 Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings A warning notice calls attention to a condition that could harm you A caution notice calls attention to a condition that could damage the printer Information vital to proper operation of the printer NOTE A note gives you helpful tips about printer operation and maintenance Related Documents Related Documents e Maintenance Manual Explains how to maintain and repair the line matrix printer at the field service level of maintenance e Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual Covers the host control codes and character sets for the Coax and Twinax emulations e Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for the Simple Protocol Converter Option Covers the host control codes and character sets for the Coax and Twinax Simple Protocol Converter emulations e LinePrinter Plus Programmer s Reference Manual Covers the host control codes for the LinePrinter Plus emulation e IGP PGL Programmer s Reference Manual Provides information used with the optional IGP Printronix emulation enhancement feature e IGP VGL Progr
293. ulate the IGP 10 mode e Enable The IGP emulates the IGP 10 version Auto FF at PN e Disable default A form feed will not be generated automatically when the PN command is encountered e Enable A form feed will be generated automatically to slew to the top of the next form when the PN command is encountered and when the current vertical position is not at top of form Ignore Lxx Cmd e Disable default e Enable The Lxx command will always be ignored 160 IGP VGL Submenu Error Handling Following are several options which define how errors are reported Error Msgs e Enable default Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when command parameters are incorrect e Disable Error checking and error messages are suppressed Error Markers e Enable default Prints the following error markers for those elements that print beyond the page boundaries gt gt for elements that begin off the right side of the page lt lt for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page for elements where the starting position of the command contains an error other than an off page error Offpage Errors e Disable default Does not report errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page e Enable Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page Barcode Errors e Enable default An error message will print wh
294. ulation 262 Define CR Code 133 222 ANSI Emulation menu 253 Epson FX Emulation 241 Proprinter XL Emulation 236 P Series XQ Emulation 229 Serial Matrix Emulation 233 Define LF Code 133 222 ANSI Emulation menu 253 Epson FX Emulation 242 Proprinter XL Emulation 237 P Series XQ Emulation 229 Serial Matrix Emulation 233 Delete Config 83 Demand Data Request Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 295 Device Address 182 207 Device ID 75 182 DHCP Adapter Address menu 110 Ethernet Address menu 114 WLAN Address menu 118 DIAGNOSTIC PASSED message 325 DIAGNOSTICS menu 289 DRAM Avail 292 Flash Avail 292 Paper Out Dots 291 Print Statistics 292 Printer Tests 290 378 System Memory 291 Test Width 289 Dimensions printer 23 348 Display Functions PCL II Emulation 266 Display Language PRINTER CONTROL 280 DO NOT POWER OFF message 325 Documentation list 19 Downloaded Fonts ADVANCED USER menu 283 DRAM Avail DIAGNOSTICS 292 DRVR CIR BAD message 325 E E NET TEST UNAVAILABLE message 326 Early Print Cmpl 172 3270 Params menu 189 Early Print Comp Complete IPDS Emulation 260 Eject Function PRINTER CONTROL menu 277 Electrical Characteristics 350 Elong Alt Font P Series XQ Emulation 230 EMULATION Menu 166 Emulation GP PGL 126 Energy Star compliance 349 E Net Adapter submenu 106 ENTER key 31 Environmental characteristics 348 Epson FX Character Set menu 244 245
295. ult Does not perform a line feed The next print position will be print position 1 of the current line e CR CR LF Performs an automatic line feed The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Define LF Line Feed Code This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs This can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer e LF LLF default Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e LF CR LF Performs an automatic carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Autowrap This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of text exceeds the right margin e Disable default Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR LF is received e Enable Automatically inserts a CR LF after a full print line PGL SFCC You can specify which hex code 1 255 will be used as the Special Function Control Code SFCC The factory default setting is 126 The SFCC denotes that the following data is a PGL command 133 Chapter 4 134 IGP PGL Emulation PI Slew Range You can specify how many lines the paper will feed e 15 A paper slew of 1 15 will move 1 15 lines A paper slew of 0 will move
296. used ribbon is installed and determines the ribbon s length ink color and expected yield The ribbon life starting from 100 when new and decreasing to 0 when depleted is always displayed on the control panel See Figure 5 on page 28 When the ribbon life reaches 2 a warning message RIBBON UNDER 2 Change RBN soon appears on the control panel display The control panel status indicator lamp flashes The printer will continue printing in this condition until the ribbon life reaches 0 at which time printing will stop The ribbon may be changed at any time while the printer is in the RBN END POINT Change Ribbon condition without losing data in the printer s buffer Simply follow the procedures outlined below to change the ribbon You may also resume printing for approximately two more minutes without changing the ribbon by pressing the ON LINE CLEAR key twice This may be done as many times as needed to complete the job in progress Lighter Or Darker Print The ribbon life value as determined by the Integrated Print Management System is factory set so that the image quality at the end of the ribbon life is as good as it was when the ribbon was new You may adjust the ribbon end point for a lighter or darker image as required for your printing needs See PRINTER CONTROL on page 276 Changing Ribbons Changing Ribbons Before changing the ribbon determine whether you want to make the print lighter extend t
297. ution table is active If the power up configuration has Ld Set at Pwrup and Set Substitution both enabled the character set overlay is automatically activated at power up or during a soft reset See the LinePrinter Plus Programmer s Reference Manual for more information Barcode X Offset e Disable default e Enable Allows text to print next to a barcode when xxxx and yyyy are not set to the origin P Series Emulation Printer Protocol from page 209 P Series P Series Emulation Factory Default Control Code Control Code Define CR Auto LF Overstrike Define LF 06 08 Code Code 8 0 LPI Elongated CR CR Disable Enable LF CR LF 10 3 LPI Backspace CR CR LF Enable Disable LF LF 6 0 LPI P Series VFU Select Alt Set Character SFCC d PSeries Dbl SFCC 80 9F Set Command High a EVFU Control Code see page 225 Even dot plot Normal 0 7F hex DVFU Printable Double high P3 4 6 9 Compat CVFU Disable FF valid at TOF Enable Disable 219 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation with PCL Il Printer Protocol from page 209 P Series P Series Emulation with PCL Il Control Code DefineCR Factory Default Control Code Auto
298. ved from the input data stream and will not be processed This may cause problems with the transmission of binary data e g control codes bit image etc If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character and another poll character is received the second poll character has no effect and is removed from the input data stream If a transition from buffer full to empty or online to offline occurs during a poll delay the new printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay Serial Submenu The response characters are described in Table 3 Table 3 Series1 1 Char Response Characters Printer State Response Online and Buffer Empty CR Online and Buffer Full 3 Offline and Buffer Empty 0 Offline and Buffer Full 2 SERIES1 2 CHAR This protocol behaves exactly the same as the Series1 Char except there is a two character response to the host The response characters are described in Table 4 Table 4 Series1 2 Char Response Characters Printer State Response Online and Buffer Empty 1CR Online and Buffer Full 3 CR Offline and Buffer Empty O CR Offline and Buffer Full 2 CR DTR The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to the host If there is enough room in the printer buffer the printer will send a high signal if the buffer is full the printer will send a low signal DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data If the host sen
299. ways move 1 line Prt To Emulate This option allows you to select an earlier model printer IGP board combination to emulate When a printer emulation is selected the scaling command causes the printer to generate a graphic image in the same density as the printer emulation chosen Five types of printers can be emulated MVP or MVP 150B L150 P3040 P6000 and P9000 Once a printer emulation is selected it remains active until the printer is turned off or another printer emulation is selected All new users with new applications should select the Disable option which insures the printer behaves as described in this manual The other compatibility modes are required to emulate the behaviors of older printers which may be inconsistent with the documented VGL functionality Proper use of this feature requires the printer to be equipped with high resolution hammer bank tips 12 mil IGP VGL Submenu IGP VGL Font Set Menu Factory Default Font Set see page 148 Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets 0 ASCII ASMO 449 Code Page 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek 1 German ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek 2 Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 3 Danish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek 4 Norwegian MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek 5 Finnish MS DOS CP720 Code Page
300. wer up configuration Protect Configs You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs parameter When disabled default the new configuration will overwrite the existing configuration When enabled the new configuration will not overwrite the existing configuration and the message CONFIG EXISTS Delete First displays 83 84 Chapter 4 CONFIG CONTROL Name Configs You may specify a 15 character name which can be used to refer to a configuration The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load Config Save Config Print Config Delete Config and Power Up Config menus The name can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu When you move into the Name Configs menu the top line of the display shows the current configuration name The second line of the display is initially the same as the top line You can modify the second line of the display without affecting the top line until the ENTER key is pressed which sets the modified name Press the UP or DOWN 4 or keys to cycle through the values available for that character at the cursor location Press the NEXT gt key to move to the next character to be modified Press the PREV key 4 to go back to a character you have already modified Continue until you have entered the name you want to give to this configuration then press ENTER to save The name y
301. with normal printer operation Bar Code Verification The most important consideration when printing a bar code is to ensure that the bar code will be scanned properly Incorporating a bar code quality procedure in the printing process is the best way to ensure that bar codes are being printed correctly A properly implemented verification procedure will increase overall bar code quality reduce waste from misprinted bar codes and achieve high first time read rates A high first time read rate is an increasingly important factor in newer more efficient systems where manually entered data is not acceptable as a backup function Verification also minimizes the costs of returned products due to poor reading or unaccountable bar codes RJS designs and manufactures the world s most complete line of bar code verification products including their portable Inspector and Laser Inspector models On Line Inspector and AutoScan II series For more information on RJS bar code verifiers visit their web site at www rjs1 com Printing A Hex Dump Printing A Hex Dump A hex code printout or hex dump is a translation of all host interface data to its hexadecimal equivalent listing all ASCII character data received from the host computer with their corresponding two digit hexadecimal codes Hex dumps are used to troubleshoot printer data reception problems Printable characters print as the assigned symbol nonprintable characters are indicate
302. works or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options include e Disable default e Enable ETHERNET PARAMS ETHERNET Factory Default PARAMS from page 108 NetBIOS ASCII IPDS Data Keep Alive Ethernet Protocol Data Port Port Timer Speed Enable 9100 5001 3 Minutes Auto Select Disable 1023 65535 1023 65535 2 10 Minutes 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex Job Control Standard Enhanced Off The ETHERNET PARAMS menu helps your printer communicate on a network For information on assigning the IP Address Gateway Address Subnet Mask and MAC Address refer to the Network Interface Card User s Manual NetBIOS Protocol This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be available The selections are as indicated below e Enable default Makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the ethernet installe
303. y Print Complete on page 172 For the Coax Twinax Emulation menu refer to page 167 69 Chapter 4 Main Menu Main Menu OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL page 82 HOST INTERFACE page 85 NETWORK SETUP page 108 ACTIVE IGP EMUL page 125 Host Interface Load Config Auto Switching Adapter Address 1 IGP PGL Device ID 2 Save Config Dataproducts Adapter Params IGP VGL Adapter Address 1 Print Config Centronics Ethernet Address 1 not shown if any Ethernet Address Delete Config Serial Ethernet Params below are installed WLAN Address Power Up Config Twinax d WLAN Address ANSI if installed Active IGP Emul Protect Configs Coax WLAN Params PCL lI if installed PGL SFCC Name Configs E Net Adapter LG if installed Printer Protocol 4 Reset Cfg Names IEEE lect LP with any above Form Length Ethernet Form Width 4 P Series SFCC Margins 5 Form Length Form Width 3 Vert Forms Horiz Forms Page Length Rep 7 Max Line Width 7 Ribbon End Point Save Config Power Up Config 1f installed 2 If Twinax is selected 3 If VGL is enabled 4 If LP is selected 5 If ANSI is installed 6 If LG is installed 7 If PCL II is installed Figure 22 Main Menu Configuration 70 EMULATION page 166 CTHI LinePrinter 44 48XX ANSI IGP PGL IGP VGL IPDS 1 LG PCL II 1 PRINTER CONTROL page 276 Ribbon End Point Eject Function Open Platen BOF Bar
304. z 2A 460W 1571 P7220 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 5 5A 540W 1844 AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 2 1A 540W 1844 The above values are calculated while printing 136 column all upper case high speed E s The stand by Energy Saver mode wattage is 28W 96 BTU Hr for all models 350 Interfaces Type Standard Optional Logic Levels Transfer Rates Printing Rates IEEE 1284 Parallel Centronics Parallel RS 232 serial Dataproducts Parallel Coax Twinax RS 422 serial Ethernet 10 100Base T TTL EIA 232E EIA 422B Up to 200 Kilobytes on parallel interface Up to 19 2K baud on RS 232 serial interface Up to 115 2K baud on RS 422 serial interface The printing speed of text is measured in lines per minute lpm and is a function of the selected font and the vertical dot density Printing speed is independent of the number of characters configured in the character set repertoire Print rates for lines containing attributes such as bold or emphasized printing superscripts subscripts or elongated attributes will decrease to not less than half the rates of the font without such attributes The exact print rate of lines containing these attributes depends on the specific print job but software maximizes the throughput by dynamically determining which dot rows contain adjacent dots and must be printed in two strokes The reverse paper feed capability allows the printing of multiple densities on a single

Printronix P7000 Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents